Automatic Transaxle: Service Data and Specifications (SDS) Have Been Changed

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE GI
MODIFICATION NOTICE:
SECTION AT MA
EM
LC
I Service data and specifications (SDS) have been changed.
EC
CONTENTS FE
EURO-OBD EURO-OBD CL
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................5 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................5 DESCRIPTION ...............................................................53
MT
Introduction ................................................................53
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................7 EURO-OBD Function for A/T System .......................53
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR One or Two Trip Detection Logic of EURO-OBD......53
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............7 EURO-OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)............53
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (EURO- Malfunction Indicator (MI) ..........................................57
OBD) System of A/T and Engine - Euro-OBD -..........7 CONSULT-II ...............................................................57 AX
Precautions ..................................................................7 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II..............66
Service Notice or Precautions .....................................9
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................10
SU
EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
PREPARATION .............................................................11
Special Service Tools ................................................11 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................72
Introduction ................................................................72
BR
Commercial Service Tools .........................................13
A/T FLUID ......................................................................15 Work Flow..................................................................76
Checking A/T Fluid ....................................................15 ST
Changing A/T Fluid ....................................................15 EURO-OBD
OVERALL SYSTEM ......................................................16 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................77
A/T Electrical Parts Location .....................................16
RS
Introduction ................................................................77
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................18 Work Flow..................................................................81
Cross-sectional View - Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 BT
models .......................................................................20 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...........83
Cross-sectional View - 3AX10 and 3AX18 A/T Fluid Check .........................................................83
models .......................................................................21 Stall Test ....................................................................83 HA
Hydraulic Control Circuit............................................22 Line Pressure Test.....................................................87
Shift Mechanism ........................................................23 Road Test...................................................................88
Control System ..........................................................32 SC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
Control Mechanism....................................................33 DESCRIPTION .............................................................108
Control Valve .............................................................38 Symptom Chart........................................................108 EL
TCM Terminals and Reference Value......................119
EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........124
Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN....................................124 IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................40 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................125
CONSULT-II ...............................................................40
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II..............45 EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T (REVOLUTION

SENSOR) .....................................................................127
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Description ...............................................................127 EURO-OBD
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T ................................129
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................130
SWITCH .......................................................................184
VHCL SPEED SEN.MTR VEHICLE SPEED
Description ...............................................................184
SENSOR.MTR..............................................................132
Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW...............................186
Description ...............................................................132
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR..............................133
Component Inspection.............................................189
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR................................135
CIRCUIT .......................................................................190
Description ...............................................................135
Description ...............................................................190
Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS......................................137
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS ......................................192
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A.......................................143
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T
Description ...............................................................143
(REVOLUTION SENSOR) ...........................................196
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ..................................145
Description ...............................................................196
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T ................................198
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ......................................149
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL .......................201
Description ...............................................................149
Description ...............................................................201
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ..................................151
Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS ................................202
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ....................205
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE...................155
Description ...............................................................205
Description ...............................................................155
Wiring Diagram - AT - 1ST ......................................208
Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV..............................156
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION....................212
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
Description ...............................................................212
VALVE..........................................................................160
Wiring Diagram - AT - 2ND......................................215
Description ...............................................................160
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV......................................162
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION....................218
Description ...............................................................218
BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP
Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RD......................................221
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) ....166
Description ...............................................................166
Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS ................................168
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION ....................224
Description ...............................................................224
Wiring Diagram - AT - 4TH ......................................228
ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL............................................173
Description ...............................................................173
Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS ................................174
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................234
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE .......................177
Description ...............................................................234
Description ...............................................................177
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV......................................236
Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV....................................179
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE ...240
Description ...............................................................240
Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV....................................242
AT-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Component Inspection.............................................246 Large Shock. ″N″ -> ″R″ Position............................302 GI
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ..................247 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In ″R″
Description ...............................................................247 Position ....................................................................304
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ..................................249 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In ″D″, ″2″ Or MA
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................250 ″1″ Position ..............................................................307
Component Inspection.............................................252 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 .......................310
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ..................253 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2 Or Does Not
EM
Description ...............................................................253 Kickdown: D4 -> D2..................................................313
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ..................................255 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3...................................316 LC
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................256 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4...................................319
Component Inspection.............................................258 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ...............................322
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........259 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ....................324 EC
Description ...............................................................259 Lock-up Is Not Released .........................................326
Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS......................................262 Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................263 Braking D4 -> D3).....................................................327 FE
Component Inspection.............................................267 Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 .............................329
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D3, When Overdrive CL
VALVE..........................................................................268 Control Switch ″ON″ -> ″OFF″ ................................330
Description ...............................................................268 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> 22, When Selector
Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV..............................270 Lever ″D″ -> ″2″ Position.........................................331 MT
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................271 A/T Does Not Shift: 22 -> 11, When Selector
Component Inspection.............................................273 Lever ″2″ -> ″1″ Position .........................................332
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ......334
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) ....274 TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate ...................336
Description ...............................................................274 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM.........................................346
AX
Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS ................................276 Description ...............................................................346
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................277 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location............346
Component Inspection.............................................280 Wiring Diagram - SHIFT -........................................347 SU
DTC VHCL SPEED SEN.MTR VEHICLE SPEED Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................348
SENSOR.MTR..............................................................281 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ..........................................352
Description ...............................................................281 Components.............................................................352 BR
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR..............................283 Removal...................................................................352
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................285 Installation................................................................353
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ..............................................354
ST
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators.............354
(ROM)...........................................................................286 Control Cable Adjustment........................................355 RS
Description ...............................................................286 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment .....355
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................286 Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement ...................356
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) .............................288 Revolution Sensor Replacement .............................356 BT
Description ...............................................................288 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................357
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................289 Removal...................................................................357
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ...............290 Installation................................................................358 HA
Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC/Except for OVERHAUL .................................................................360
EURO-OBD..............................................................290 Components-1 Except 3AX10 and 3AX18
SC
Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC/EURO-OBD .........292 models .....................................................................360
O/D OFF or A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Components-1 3AX10 and 3AX18 models .............361
Not Come On...........................................................294 Components-2 Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 EL
Engine Cannot Be Started In ″P″ and ″N″ models .....................................................................362
Position ....................................................................297 Components-2 3AX10 and 3AX18 models .............363
In ″P″ Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Components-3 Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 IDX
Backward When Pushed .........................................299 models .....................................................................364
In ″N″ Position, Vehicle Moves................................300 Components-3 3AX10 and 3AX18 models .............365
AT-3
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Oil Channel ..............................................................366 Assembly (2)............................................................458
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Adjustment (2) .........................................................462
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings - Except 3AX10 Assembly (3)............................................................465
and 3AX18 models ..................................................367 Assembly (4)............................................................468
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......473
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings - 3AX10 and General Specifications.............................................473
3AX18 models .........................................................368 Shift Schedule..........................................................473
DISASSEMBLY............................................................369 Stall Revolution........................................................478
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS .........................384 Line Pressure...........................................................478
Manual Shaft............................................................384 Control Valves..........................................................479
Oil Pump ..................................................................387 Clutch and Brakes ...................................................479
Control Valve Assembly...........................................391 Clutch and Brake Return Springs............................482
Control Valve Upper Body .......................................400 Oil Pump ..................................................................483
Control Valve Lower Body .......................................404 Input Shaft ...............................................................483
Reverse Clutch ........................................................406 Planetary Carrier......................................................483
High Clutch ..............................................................410 Final Drive................................................................483
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch........................415 Reduction Pinion Gear ............................................485
Low & Reverse Brake..............................................422 Output Shaft - Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models ..487
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Output Shaft - 3AX10 and 3AX18 models ..............489
Overrun Clutch Hub.................................................426 Bearing Retainer......................................................490
O/Shaft, O/Gear, I/Gear, R/Pinion Gear and B/ Total End Play..........................................................490
Retainer - Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models.........430 Reverse Clutch End Play ........................................490
Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear Accumulator .............................................................490
and Bearing Retainer - 3AX10 and 3AX18 Band Servo ..............................................................491
models .....................................................................435 Removal and Installation .........................................491
Band Servo Piston Assembly ..................................440 Shift Solenoid Valves...............................................491
Final Drive................................................................445 Solenoid Valves .......................................................491
ASSEMBLY..................................................................449 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor.................................491
Assembly (1)............................................................449 Revolution Sensor ...................................................491
Adjustment (1) .........................................................450 Dropping Resistor ....................................................491
AT-4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX EURO-OBD
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NJAT0243

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD system or not by the
NJAT0243S01
GI
“Type approval number” on the identification plate. Refer to GI-45,
“IDENTIFICATION PLATE”. MA
Type approval number Model
Available With Euro-OBD system EM

Not available (blank) Without Euro-OBD system
LC
DTC
Items
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II EC
GST*1
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-205

FE
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-212
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-218

CL
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-224
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-190

MT
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-201
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-240
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-268
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-184 AX

SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 P0750 AT-247
SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 P0755 AT-253 SU

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-234
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 P1705 AT-259 BR

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 P0720 AT-196
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

ST
*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-5
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX EURO-OBD
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC =NJAT0243S02
Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD system or not by the
“Type approval number” on the identification plate. Refer to GI-45,
“IDENTIFICATION PLATE”.
Type approval number Model
Available With Euro-OBD system
Not available (blank) Without Euro-OBD system
DTC
Items
CONSULT-II Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
GST*1
P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-184
P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-190
P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 AT-196
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-201
P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-205
P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-212
P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-218
P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-224
P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-234
P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-240
P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 AT-247
P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 AT-253
P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 AT-259
P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-268
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
AT-6
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
NJAT0249
GI
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N16 is as follows (The compo- MA
sition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer- EM
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), front seat
belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision LC
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), side air bag (satellite) sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal
collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision). EC
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING: FE
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer. CL
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section. MT
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation tape either just
before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (EURO-
OBD) System of A/T and Engine — Euro-OBD AX
— NJAT0245
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the SU
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any BR
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will ST
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
RS
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube BT
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system,
etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and HA
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precautions NJAT0246
SC
I Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the EL
TCM. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
IDX
SEF289H
AT-7
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
AAT470A
I Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

inspection and make sure whether TCM functions prop-
erly or not. (See page AT-119.)
MEF040DA
I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.
SAT652J
I Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the out-

side of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts
from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
I Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
I Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common
shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the opera-
tion of the transaxle.
I Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper
assembly.
I All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose,
non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly.
I Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the
transaxle is disassembled.
I It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they
are indicated.
I The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme
care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disas-
sembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper
assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from
becoming scattered or lost.
I Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along
bores in valve body under their own weight.
I Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all
AT-8
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or
hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not
use grease. GI
I Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings,
seals and gaskets when assembling.
I After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF. MA
I When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is
drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF
cooling system.
EM
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the
AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to “Changing A/T
Fluid”, AT-15.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Service Notice or Precautions NJAT0247
FAIL-SAFE NJAT0247S01
The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major
electrical input/output device circuit is damaged. AX
Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of “1”, “2” or “D”. The
customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration.
When the ignition key is turned “ON” following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp blinks SU
for about 8 seconds. [EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD; “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-
II)”, refer to AT-45 and for EURO-OBD; “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, refer to AT-66.]
The blinking of the O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be BR
cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions.
Always follow the “WORK FLOW” [Refer to AT-76 (EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD), AT-81 (EURO-OBD).]
The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows: ST
The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor.
During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.
RS
TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE NJAT0247S02
The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions:
I External leaks in the hub weld area. BT
I Converter hub is scored or damaged.
I Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft. HA
I Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines.
I Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter.
I Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses SC
have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.)
I Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze. EL
I Internal failure of stator roller clutch.
I Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter).
I Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are IDX
worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter.
The torque converter should not be replaced if:
I The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles.
I The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.
AT-9
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions (Cont’d)
I Transaxle failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate
lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter.
I Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch
dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such
as taxi, delivery or police use.
EURO-OBD SELF-DIAGNOSIS — EURO-OBD — NJAT0247S04
I A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator (MI). Refer to the table on AT-58
for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
I The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MI are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memo-
ries.
Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-55 to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MI.
I The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when
the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.
− PNP switch
− A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function
*: For details of EURO-OBD, refer to EC-545, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”.
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to EURO-OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL-7, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NJAT0248
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-12, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-33, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-22, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
AT-10
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools NJAT0006
Tool number
Description GI
Tool name
ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

Oil pressure gauge set MA
1 ST25051001
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000 EM
Hose
3 ST25053000
Joint pipe LC
4 ST25054000
Adapter
5 ST25055000 EC
Adapter NT097
KV31103000 Installing differential oil seal

Drift (Use with ST35325000.) FE
a: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
CL
NT105
ST35325000 Installing differential oil seal

Drift (Use with KV31103000.)
MT
a: 215 mm (8.46 in)
b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
c: M12 x 1.5P
NT417 AX
KV31103200 Removing and installing clutch return spring
Clutch spring compres- a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
sor b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
SU
BR
ST
NT423
ST23540000 Removing and installing parking rod plate, manual RS

Pin punch plate and differential pinion mate shaft retaining
pins
a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia. BT
b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
NT442
KV32101000 Installing throttle lever and manual shaft retaining HA

Pin punch pins
a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
SC
NT410 EL
ST25710000 Aligning groove of manual shaft and hole of trans-
Pin punch mission case
a: 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. IDX
NT410
AT-11
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
Description
Tool name
ST3306S001 Removing differential side bearing inner race

Differential side bearing a: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia.
puller set b: 29.5 mm (1.161 in) dia.
1 ST33051001 c: 130 mm (5.12 in)
Puller d: 135 mm (5.31 in)
2 ST33061000 e: 120 mm (4.72 in)
Adapter
NT745
KV381054S0 I Removing idler gear bearing outer race

Puller I Removing differential side oil seals
I Removing differential side bearing outer race
I Removing needle bearing from bearing retainer
a: 250 mm (9.84 in)
b: 160 mm (6.30 in)
NT414
ST27180001 I Removing idler gear

Puller a: 100 mm (3.94 in)
b: 110 mm (4.33 in)
c: M8 x 1.25P
NT424
ST30031000 Removing reduction gear bearing inner race

Puller a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
NT411
ST35272000 I Installing reduction gear bearing inner race

Drift I Installing idler gear bearing inner race
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 35.5 mm (1.398 in) dia.
NT426
ST37830000 Installing idler gear bearing outer race

Drift a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
b: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia.
NT427
ST35321000 Installing output shaft bearing

b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
NT073
AT-12
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
Description
Tool name
GI
ST30633000 Installing differential side bearing outer race
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. MA
NT073
EM
ST35271000 I Installing idler gear
Drift a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. LC
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
EC
NT115
ST33400001 I Installing oil pump housing oil seal

FE
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
CL
NT115
KV38105710 I Measuring clearance between side gear and MT

Preload adapter differential case
NT087
KV40104840 I Installing output shaft bearing outer race onto

Drift bearing retainer AX
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
b: 42 mm (1.65 in) dia.
SU
NT108
BR
Commercial Service Tools NJAT0007 ST

Tool name Description
Puller I Removing idler gear bearing inner race RS

I Removing and installing band servo
piston snap ring
BT
NT077
HA
Drift Removing idler gear bearing inner race
a: 34 mm (1.34 in) dia.
SC
NT109
Drift Installing differential left side bearing EL

a: 86 mm (3.39 in) dia.
b: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
IDX
NT115
AT-13
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool name Description
Drift Installing differential right side bearing

a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
NT115
AT-14
A/T FLUID
Checking A/T Fluid
Checking A/T Fluid NJAT0228

1. Warm up engine.
2. Check for fluid leakage. GI
3. Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures
of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD” range on dipstick. MA
a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear posi-
tion. Leave selector lever in “P” position. EM
c. Check fluid level with engine idling.
d. Remove dipstick and note reading. If level is at low side of
SMA827CA
either range, and fluid to the charging pipe. LC
e. Re-insert dipstick into charging pipe as far as it will go.
f. Remove dipstick and note reading. If reading is at low side of EC
range, add fluid to the charging pipe.
Do not overfill.
4. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. FE
5. Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F) using “HOT” range on dipstick. CL
MT
6. Check fluid condition.
I If fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to AT section for
checking operation of A/T. Flush cooling system after repair of
A/T.
I If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), AX
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent
and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to LC-17, “Radia-
tor”. SU
BR
SMA853B
Changing A/T Fluid NJAT0229 ST

1. Warm up A/T fluid.
2. Stop engine.
3. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid. RS
Always refill same volume with drained fluid.
Fluid grade:
Genuine NISSAN ATF or equivalent. Refer to “REC-
BT
OMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”, MA-21.
Fluid capacity (With torque converter): HA
SMA027D
7.0 (6-1/8 Imp qt)
Drain plug:
: 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) SC
4. Run engine at idle speed for five minutes.
5. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to “Checking A/T Fluid”. EL
If fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5.
IDX
AT-15
OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location
A/T Electrical Parts Location NJAT0008

EXCEPT FOR AUSTRALIA & THE MIDDLE EAST NJAT0008S01
SAT069K
AT-16
OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location (Cont’d)
AUSTRALIA & MIDDLE EAST NJAT0008S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT275KA
AT-17
OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram NJAT0009

EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD NJAT0009S01
GAT098A
AT-18
OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram (Cont’d)
EURO-OBD NJAT0009S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT128
AT-19
OVERALL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View — Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Cross-sectional View — Except 3AX10 and

3AX18 models NJAT0011
SAT042K
AT-20
OVERALL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View — 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Cross-sectional View — 3AX10 and 3AX18

models NJAT0217
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT842J
AT-21
OVERALL SYSTEM
Hydraulic Control Circuit
Hydraulic Control Circuit NJAT0012
SAT844J
AT-22
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism
Shift Mechanism NJAT0013

CONSTRUCTION NJAT0013S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT998I
MT
1. Torque converter 9. Front internal gear 17. Overrun clutch
2. Oil pump 10. Front planetary carrier 18. Low one-way clutch
3. Input shaft 11. Rear sun gear 19. Low & reverse brake
4. Brake band 12. Rear pinion gear 20. Parking pawl
5. Reverse clutch 13. Rear internal gear 21. Parking gear AX
6. High clutch 14. Rear planetary carrier 22. Output shaft
7. Front sun gear 15. Forward clutch 23. Idle gear
8. Front pinion gear 16. Forward one-way clutch 24. Output gear SU
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE NJAT0013S03

BR
Clutch and brake components Abbr. Function
5 Reverse clutch R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 7.

ST
6 High clutch H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 10.
15 Forward clutch F/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with forward one-way clutch 16.
RS
17 Overrun clutch O/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with rear internal gear 13.
BT
4 Brake band B/B To lock front sun gear 7.
16 Forward one-way clutch F/O.C When forward clutch 15 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 13 from rotat-
ing in opposite direction against engine revolution. HA
18 Low one-way clutch L/O.C To stop front planetary carrier 10 from rotating in opposite direction against
engine revolution. SC
19 Low & reverse brake L & R/B To lock front planetary carrier 10.
EL
IDX
AT-23
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART NJAT0013S04
Band servo Low

For- Over- Forward Low &
Reverse High one-
ward run one-way reverse
Shift position clutch clutch way Lock-up Remarks
clutch clutch 2nd 3rd 4th clutch brake
5 6 clutch
15 17 apply release apply 16 19
18
PARK
P
POSITION
REVERSE
R q q
POSITION
NEUTRAL
N
POSITION
1st q *1D B B
Automatic
2nd q *1A q B shift
D*4
3rd q q *1A *2C C B *1q 1k2k3
k4
4th q C *3C C q q
1st q q B B Automatic
2 shift
2nd q q q B 1k2
Locks (held
1st q q B q
stationary)
1 in 1st
speed
2nd q q q B
1g2
*1: Operates when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.

*2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract
because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.
*3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.
*4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.
q : Operates.
A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.
B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
C: Operates but does not affect power transmission.
D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.
AT-24
OVERALL SYSTEM
POWER TRANSMISSION =NJAT0013S02
“N” and “P” Positions
I “N” position
NJAT0013S0201
GI
Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the clutches do not operate.
I “P” position MA
Similar to the “N” position, the clutches do not operate. The parking pawl engages with the parking gear
to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT991I
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-25
OVERALL SYSTEM
“11” Position =NJAT0013S0202
I Forward clutch As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and
I Forward one-way clutch reverse brake.
I Overrun clutch This is different from that of D1 and 21.
I Low and reverse brake
Engine brake Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when
decelerating.
SAT374JA
AT-26
OVERALL SYSTEM
“D1” and “21” Positions =NJAT0013S0203
I Forward one-way clutch Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of GI
I Forward clutch these three clutches.
I Low one-way clutch
D1: Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16 MA
Overrun clutch
21: Always engaged
engagement conditions
At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-
(Engine brake)
way clutch. EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT377J
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-27
OVERALL SYSTEM
“D2”, “22” and “12” Positions =NJAT0013S0204
I Forward clutch Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now
I Forward one-way rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
clutch As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward
I Brake band one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier com-
pared with that of the 1st speed.
Overrun clutch D2: Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
engagement conditions 22 and 12: Always engaged
SAT378J
AT-28
OVERALL SYSTEM
“D3” Position =NJAT0013S0205
I High clutch Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is GI
I Forward clutch connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch.
I Forward one-way This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier
clutch to turn at the same speed.
MA
Overrun clutch D3: Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
engagement conditions
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT379J
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-29
OVERALL SYSTEM
“D4” (OD) Position =NJAT0013S0206
I High clutch Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
I Brake band This front carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes
I Forward clutch (Does not affect power front internal gear (output) turn faster.
transmission)
At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine
Engine brake
brake can be obtained when decelerating.
SAT380J
AT-30
OVERALL SYSTEM
“R” Position =NJAT0013S0207
I Reverse clutch Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse GI
I Low and reverse brake brake.
Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front
internal gear in the opposite direction.
MA
As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be
Engine brake
obtained when decelerating.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT381J
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-31
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System
Control System =NJAT0014

OUTLINE NJAT0014S01
The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various switches and sensors. It always
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SWITCHES & SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS
PNP switch
Throttle position sensor
Closed throttle position switch Shift control Shift solenoid valve A
Wide open throttle position Line pressure control Shift solenoid valve B
switch Lock-up control Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Engine speed signal Overrun clutch control Torque converter clutch sole-
A/T fluid temperature sensor E Timing control E noid valve
Revolution sensor Fail-safe control Line pressure solenoid valve
Vehicle speed sensor Self-diagnosis O/D OFF indicator lamp (With
Overdrive control switch (With CONSULT-II communication overdrive control switch)
overdrive control switch) line control A/T check indicator lamp (With-
Stop lamp switch Duet-EA control out overdrive control switch)
A/T check switch (Without over-
drive control switch)
CONTROL SYSTEM NJAT0014S02
SAT276KA
AT-32
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System (Cont’d)
TCM FUNCTION =NJAT0014S03
The function of the TCM is to:
I Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. GI
I Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
I Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. MA
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM NJAT0014S04
Sensors, switches and solenoid Function EM

valves
PNP switch Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM. LC
Throttle position sensor Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM.
Closed throttle position switch Detects throttle valve’s fully-closed position and sends a signal to TCM. EC
Detects a throttle valve position of greater than 1/2 of full throttle and
Wide open throttle position switch
sends a signal to TCM.
FE
Engine speed signal From ECM.
A/T fluid temperature sensor Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM.
Input CL
Revolution sensor Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM.
Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolu-

Vehicle speed sensor
tion sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions.
MT
Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to “D4” (overdrive) position, to the
Overdrive control switch*1
TCM.
Stop lamp switch Releases lock-up system when depressing pedal in lock-up condition.
A/T check switch*2 Inputs a signal for AT self-diagnosis. AX

Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal
Shift solenoid valve A/B
sent from TCM. SU
Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in rela-
Line pressure solenoid valve
tion to a signal sent from TCM.
BR
Torque converter clutch solenoid Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in
Output valve relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to ST

Overrun clutch solenoid valve
a signal sent from TCM.
O/D OFF indicator lamp*1 Shows TCM faults when A/T control components malfunction. RS
A/T check indicator lamp*2 Shows TCM faults when A/T control components malfunction.
*1: With overdrive control switch BT

*2: Without overdrive control switch
HA
Control Mechanism NJAT0015

SC
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL NJAT0015S01
TCM has various line pressure control characteristics to match the EL
driving conditions.
An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve
based on TCM characteristics. IDX
Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically con-
trolled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate
engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.
AT-33
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Normal Control NJAT0015S0101
The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suit-
able clutch operation.
SAT003JC
Back-up Control (Engine brake) NJAT0015S0102

If the selector lever is shifted to “2” position while driving in D4 (OD)
or D3, great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the trans-
mission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be
increased to deal with this driving force.
SAT004JC
During Shift Change NJAT0015S0103

The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a
change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift
solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting
shock.
SAT005JB
At Low Fluid Temperature NJAT0015S0104

I Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing
change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-con-
tacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid
temperature, to stabilize shifting quality.
I The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent

shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission
fluid when temperature is low.
SAT006JB
AT-34
OVERALL SYSTEM
I Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the
throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F).
This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and GI
brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low
temperature.
MA
EM
SAT007JB LC
SHIFT CONTROL NJAT0015S02
The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate EC
vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished
by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and
throttle position sensor. This results in improved acceleration per- FE
formance and fuel economy.
CL
MT
Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B NJAT0015S0201
The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to sig-
nals from the throttle position sensor and revolution sensor to
select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule
memorized in the TCM. AX
The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When
set to “ON”, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to
the shift valve. SU
BR
SAT008J
Relation Between Shift Solenoid Valves A and B and

Gear Positions ST
NJAT0015S0203
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve RS
D1, 21, 11 D2, 22, 12 D3 D4 (OD) N-P
A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed)

BT
B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)
Control of Shift Valves A and B NJAT0015S0202

HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT009J
AT-35
OVERALL SYSTEM
Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves
A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B.
The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the
shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied to the end face
of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward.
LOCK-UP CONTROL NJAT0015S03
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked
to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission
efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty
signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to an oil pres-
sure signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston.
Conditions for Lock-up Operation NJAT0015S0301
When vehicle is driven in 3rd or 4th gear position, vehicle speed
and throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within
the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.
Overdrive control switch ON OFF
Selector lever “D” position
Gear position D4 D3
Vehicle speed sensor More than set value
Throttle position sensor Less than set opening
Closed throttle position switch OFF
A/T fluid temperature sensor More than 40°C (104°F)
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control NJAT0015S0302

The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the
TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the “OFF” period,
and opens the circuit during the “ON” period. If the percentage of
OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is
reduced and pilot pressure remains high.
The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the
ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock.
SAT010J
OFF-time INCREASING
"
Amount of drain DECREASING
"
Pilot pressure HIGH
"
Lock-up RELEASING
SAT011J
AT-36
OVERALL SYSTEM
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve OperationNJAT0015S0303
GI
MA
EM
LC
AAT155A
Lock-up released EC
The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end
face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with FE
spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter
pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston
release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston CL
remains unlocked.
Lock-up applied
When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid MT
valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly,
the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the
other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pres-
sure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch
piston applied.
Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and AX
release of the lock-up.
OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE SU
CONTROL) NJAT0015S04
Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in down-
shifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the BR
wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to
the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the
engine brake is not effective. ST
The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.
Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions NJAT0015S0401
RS
Selector lever position Gear position Throttle opening
“D” position D1, D2, D3 gear position Less than 3/16 BT

“2” position 21, 22 gear position
At any position HA
“1” position 11, 12 gear position
SC
EL
IDX
SAT014J
AT-37
OVERALL SYSTEM
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control NJAT0015S0402
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF sig-
nal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control
(engine brake control).
When this solenoid valve is “ON”, the pilot pressure drain port
closes. When it is “OFF”, the drain port opens.
During the solenoid valve “ON” pilot pressure is applied to the end
face of the overrun clutch control valve.
SAT015J
Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation NJAT0015S0403

When the solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure is applied to the
overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch
control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch
does not engage.
When the solenoid valve is “OFF”, pilot pressure is not generated.
At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by
spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is pro-
vided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the over-
run clutch to engage.
In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed
down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.
SAT016J
Control Valve NJAT0016

FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES NJAT0016S01
Valve name Function
Pressure regulator valve, plug Regulates oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving
and sleeve conditions.
Pressure modifier valve and Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-
sleeve modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all driving condi-
tions.
Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up
mechanism, overrun clutch, shift timing.
Accumulator control valve Regulates accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.
Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions.
Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.
Shift valve A Simultaneously switches four oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A to
meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th , 3rd ,
2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.
AT-38
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Valve (Cont’d)
Valve name Function
Shift valve B Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B in GI
relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th , 3rd ,
2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A. MA
Overrun clutch control valve Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with
application of the brake band in D4. (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch engages during
D4.) EM
1st reducing valve Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when down-shifting
from the “1” position 12 to 11. LC
Overrun clutch reducing valve Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.
In “1” and “2” positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase
the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability. EC
Torque converter relief valve Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.
Torque converter clutch control Activates or inactivates the lock-up function. FE

valve, plug and sleeve Also provides smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up system.
1-2 accumulator valve and piston Dampens the shock encountered when 2nd gear band servo contracts, and provides smooth CL
shifting.
3-2 timing valve Switches oil pressure with 3-2 timing valve according to throttle opening.
MT
Shuttle control valve Reduces shock when down-shifting from 3rd to 2nd and regulates overrun clutch.
Cooler check valve Regulates oil pressure which causes lock-up when driving at low speeds.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-39
DESCRIPTION EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II NJAT0022
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CON-
SULT-II)” (AT-40), place check marks for results on the “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET”, AT-74. Reference pages are provided follow-
ing the items.
NOTICE:
1) The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up
timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the
CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechani-
cal parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunction-
ing. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic pro-
cedures.
2) Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on
CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ
slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
I Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
I Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point
where shifts start, and
I Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point
where shifts are completed.
3) Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at
the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion
of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4) Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Opera-
tion Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)

NJAT0022S02
1. Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground
circuit. Refer to AT-119. If result is NG, refer to EL-11, “POWER
SUPPLY ROUTING”.
SAT014K
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
CONSULT-II performs “REAL TIME DIAG”.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be dis-
played at real time.
SAT987J
AT-40
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE NJAT0022S03
Detected items GI
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode) Malfunction is detected when ... Remarks
Item Display MA
No failure I No failure has been detected.
(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDICATED EM
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED**)
Initial start INITIAL START I This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shut-
ting off a power supply to the TCM, this message LC
appears on the screen.)
Revolution sensor VHCL SPEED I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from
SEN·A/T the sensor.
EC
Vehicle speed sensor VHCL SPEED I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from
(Meter) SEN·MTR the sensor. FE
Throttle position sen- THROTTLE POSI I TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage
sor SEN from the sensor.
Throttle position switch
CL
Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT SOLENOID/V A I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
to operate the solenoid valve. MT
Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT SOLENOID/V B I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
to operate the solenoid valve.
Overrun clutch sole- OVERRUN CLUTCH I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
noid valve S/V to operate the solenoid valve.
AX
T/C clutch solenoid T/C CLUTCH SOL/V I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
valve to operate the solenoid valve.
A/T fluid temperature BATT/FLUID TEMP I TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage To be displayed in SU
sensor SEN from the sensor. case of abnormality
and when no recording
is made. BR
Engine speed signal ENGINE SPEED SIG I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from
the ECM.
ST
Line pressure solenoid LINE PRESSURE S/V I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
valve to operate the solenoid valve.
TCM (RAM) CONTROL UNIT I TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning.

RS
(RAM)
TCM (ROM) CONTROL UNIT I TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. BT

(ROM)
TCM (EEP ROM) CONT UNIT (EEP I TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.
ROM)
HA
DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) NJAT0022S04 SC

Monitor item
Item Display Description Remarks
TCM input Main sig- EL
signals nals
Vehicle speed sensor 1 VHCL/S SE·A/T I Vehicle speed computed When racing engine in “N”
(A/T) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of revolution or “P” position with vehicle IDX
(Revolution sensor) X — sensor is displayed. stationary, CONSULT-II
data may not indicate 0
km/h (0 mph).
AT-41
Monitor item
Item Display TCM input Main sig- Description Remarks
signals nals
Vehicle speed sensor 2 VHCL/S SE·MTR I Vehicle speed computed Vehicle speed display may
(Meter) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of vehicle not be accurate under
speed sensor is dis- approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It
X —
played. may not indicate 0 km/h (0
mph) when vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Throttle position sensor THRTL POS I Throttle position sensor

SEN X — signal voltage is dis-
[V] played.
A/T fluid temperature sen- FLUID TEMP SE I A/T fluid temperature

sor [V] sensor signal voltage is
X — displayed.
I Signal voltage lowers as
fluid temperature rises.
Battery voltage BATTERY VOLT I Source voltage of TCM

X —
[V] is displayed.
Engine speed ENGINE SPEED I Engine speed, computed Engine speed display may
[rpm] from engine speed not be accurate under
signal, is displayed. approx. 800 rpm. It may
X X
not indicate 0 rpm even
when engine is not run-
ning.
Overdrive control switch OVERDRIVE SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] from signal of overdrive
X —
control SW or A/T check
SW is displayed.
PN position switch PN POSI SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of PN posi-
tion SW is displayed.
R position switch R POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of R position
SW is displayed.
D position switch D POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of D position
SW is displayed.
2 position switch 2 POSITION SW I ON/OFF status, com-

[ON/OFF] puted from signal of 2
X —
position SW, is dis-
played.

X —
played.
ASCD cruise signal ASCD-CRUISE I Status of ASCD cruise I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] signal is displayed. when no ASCD is
X — ON ... Cruising state mounted.
OFF ... Normal running
state
ASCD OD cut signal ASCD-OD CUT I Status of ASCD OD I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] release signal is dis- when no ASCD is
X — played. mounted.
ON ... OD released
OFF ... OD not released
AT-42
Monitor item
TCM input Main sig- GI
signals nals
Kickdown switch KICKDOWN SW I ON/OFF status, com- I This is displayed even

[ON/OFF] puted from signal of when no kickdown MA
X —
kickdown SW, is dis- switch is equipped.
played.
EM
Closed throttle position CLOSED I ON/OFF status, com-
switch THL/SW puted from signal of
X —
[ON/OFF] closed throttle position LC
SW, is displayed.
Wide open throttle position W/O THRL/P-SW I ON/OFF status, com-

switch [ON/OFF]
X —
puted from signal of EC
wide open throttle posi-
tion SW, is displayed.
Gear position GEAR I Gear position data used

FE
— X for computation by TCM,
is displayed.
CL
Selector lever position SLCT LVR POSI I Selector lever position I A specific value used for
data, used for computa- control is displayed if
— X
tion by TCM, is dis- fail-safe is activated due MT
played. to error.
Vehicle speed VEHICLE I Vehicle speed data,

SPEED — X used for computation by
[km/h] or [mph] TCM, is displayed.
Stop lamp switch BRAKE SW I ON/OFF status are dis- AX

[ON/OFF] played.
ON: Brake pedal is
X —
depressed.
OFF: Brake pedal is
SU
released.
Throttle position THROTTLE I Throttle position data, I A specific value used for BR
POSI used for computation by control is displayed if
— X
[/8] TCM, is displayed. fail-safe is activated due
to error. ST
Line pressure duty LINE PRES DTY I Control value of line
[%] pressure solenoid valve,
— X computed by TCM from RS
each input signal, is dis-
played.
BT
Torque converter clutch TCC S/V DUTY I Control value of torque
solenoid valve duty [%] converter clutch solenoid
— X valve, computed by
TCM from each input
HA
signal, is displayed.
Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT S/V A I Control value of shift Control value of solenoid is SC
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve A, com- displayed even if solenoid
— X puted by TCM from circuit is disconnected.
each input signal, is dis- The “OFF” signal is dis- EL
played. played if solenoid circuit is
shorted.
Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT S/V B I Control value of shift
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve B, com- IDX
— X puted by TCM from
played.
AT-43
Monitor item
signals nals
Overrun clutch solenoid OVERRUN/C S/V I Control value of overrun

valve [ON/OFF] clutch solenoid valve
— X computed by TCM from
each input signal is dis-
played.
Self-diagnosis display lamp SELF-D DP LMP I Control status of O/D

(O/D OFF or A/T CHECK [ON/OFF] — X OFF or A/T CHECK indi-
indicator lamp) cator lamp is displayed.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

( WITH CONSULT-II) NJAT0022S08
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to
turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait for at least 3 seconds and
then turn it “ON” again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON”, and touch “A/T”.
SAT014K
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
SAT971J
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.)
SAT970J
AT-44
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II NJAT0230

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT
CONSULT-II) GI
NJAT0230S01
With Overdrive Control Switch NJAT0230S0101
1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP

MA
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. EM
Wait 5 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position.
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT774B
4. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position. MT
5. Move selector lever to “P” position.
6. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
7. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
AX
SU
BR
SAT123KF ST
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2. RS
No © Go to “O/D OFF or A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-294.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-45
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
2 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Move selector lever to “D” position.
4. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position.
I Wait more than 2 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON”.
SAT653E
© GO TO 3.

1. Move selector lever to “2” position.
2. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position.
SAT780B
© GO TO 4.

SAT781B
© GO TO 5.
AT-46

1. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT981F EC
© GO TO 6.
FE
6 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-50. CL
MT
AX
SAT123KF SU
© DIAGNOSIS END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-47
Without Overdrive Control Switch NJAT0230S0103
1 CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Wait 5 seconds.
SAT163C
5. Does A/T check indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
SAT123KG
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.

2. Move selector lever to “D” position while pushing the shift lock release button.
3. Turn A/T check switch to “ON” position and hold it at “ON”.
SAT274KA
© GO TO 3.
AT-48

1. Move selector lever to “2” position. GI
2. Release A/T check switch (turn to “OFF” position).
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT274KA
© GO TO 4. FE
4 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 3 CL

2. Turn A/T check switch to “ON” position and release it (turn to “OFF” position).
Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position. MT
AX
SU
SAT277K BR
© GO TO 5. ST

RS
1. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT981F
© GO TO 6. IDX
AT-49

Check A/T check indicator lamp. Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-50.
SAT123KG
© DIAGNOSIS END
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE NJAT0230S02
O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp:
All judgement flickers are the same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT819H SAT806H
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SEN-
SOR).
General: AT-127
2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT807H SAT808H
Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR. ⇒ Go to THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR.
General: AT-132 General: AT-135
AT-50
4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT809H SAT812H EC
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A. ⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B.
General: AT-143 General: AT-149 FE
6th judgement flicker is longer than others. 7th judgement flicker is longer than others.
CL
MT
AX
SAT815H SAT818H
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited
nected. or disconnected.
SU
⇒ Go to OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. ⇒ Go to TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
General: AT-155 VALVE.
General: AT-160 BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT821H SAT823H
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. SC
source circuit is damaged. ⇒ Go to ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL.
⇒ Go to A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND TCM General: AT-173
POWER SOURCE. EL
General: AT-166
IDX
AT-51
10th judgement flicker is longer than others. Flickers as shown below.
SAT804H
Battery power is low.
SAT824H
Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon-
Battery is connected conversely.
nected.
(When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
⇒ Go to LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE.
General: AT-177
Lamp does not blink.
SCIA0706E
PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch
circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged.
⇒ Go to TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate.
General: AT-336
t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

( WITHOUT CONSULT-II) NJAT0230S03
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to
turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait for at least 3 seconds and
then turn it “ON” again.
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CON-
SULT-II)”. Refer to AT-45 (With Overdrive Control Switch) and
AT-48 (Without Overdrive Control Switch).
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. (The self-diagnostic results will be
erased.)
AT-52
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EURO-OBD
Introduction
Introduction NJAT0251
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (EURO-OBD) performed by the TCM in combi- GI
nation with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MI (malfunction indicator) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is MA
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with EURO-OBD self-diagnostic items. For
detail, refer to AT-58.
EM
EURO-OBD Function for A/T System NJAT0252
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (EURO-OBD) functions for the A/T system. One
function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with EURO-OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The sig- LC
nal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding EURO-OBD-related part. The other
function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MI (malfunction indicator) on the instrument panel.
Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
EC
The MI automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.
FE
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of EURO-OBD NJAT0253
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC NJAT0253S01 CL
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MI will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored
in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC MT
NJAT0253S02
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MI will not illuminate. — First Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MI will illuminate. — Second Trip
A/T-related parts for which the MI illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below. AX
MI
Items
One trip detection Two trip detection SU
Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 X
Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 X BR

Throttle position sensor or switch — DTC: P1705 X
Except above X ST
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. RS
EURO-OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
NJAT0254
BT
NJAT0254S01
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720, HA
P0725, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) SC
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction.
However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still EL
occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is rec-
ommended. IDX
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC is shown in the following page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF DIAGNOSIS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
AT-53
EURO-OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
SAT014K
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
SAT015K
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
SAT016K
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data NJAT0254S0101
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-569, “CONSULT-II”.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
AT-54
Priority Items
1 Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 GI

Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)

MA
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM EM
memory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC NJAT0254S02 LC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. EC
I When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
FE
related to EURO-OBD. For details, refer to EC-556, “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
I Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) CL
I 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
I Freeze frame data
I 1st trip freeze frame data MT
I System readiness test (SRT) codes
I Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) NJAT0254S03
I If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM. AX
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. SU
3. Touch “SELF DIAGNOSIS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
BR
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-55
SAT017K
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) NJAT0254S04

2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”. Refer to AT-66. (The engine warm-up
step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-580, “Generic Scan Tool (GST)”.
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) NJAT0254S05
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-66. (The engine warm-up step
can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Perform “EURO-OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”. Refer to AT-66.
AT-56
Malfunction Indicator (MI)
Malfunction Indicator (MI) =NJAT0255

1. The malfunction indicator will light up when the ignition switch
is turned ON without the engine running. This is for checking GI
the lamp.
I If the malfunction indicator does not light up, refer to EL-226,
“Warning Lamps”.
MA
(Or see MI & CONSULT-II in EC section. Refer to EC-560,
“Description”, “Malfunction Indicator (MI)” and EC-569, “CON-
SULT-II”.)
EM
2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator should go
SAT652J off. LC
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an emission-related (EURO-OBD) malfunction. For
detail, refer to EC-545, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM EC
DESCRIPTION”.
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT-II NJAT0256
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CON-
SULT-II)” (AT-58), place check marks for results on the “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET”, AT-79. Reference pages are provided follow-
ing the items. AX
NOTICE:
1) The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up SU
timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the
CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechani- BR
cal parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunction-
ing. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic pro-
cedures. ST
2) Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on
CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ
slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: RS
I Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
I Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point
where shifts start, and BT
I Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point
where shifts are completed. HA
3) Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at
the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion
of shifting (which is computed by TCM). SC
4) Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Opera-
tion Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit.
EL
IDX
AT-57
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)
NJAT0256S01
1. Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “ENGINE” for EURO-OBD
detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground
circuit. Refer to AT-119. If result is NG, refer to EL-11, “POWER
SUPPLY ROUTING”.
SAT014K

Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
CONSULT-II performs “real time diagnosis”.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be dis-
played at real time.
SAT987J
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE NJAT0256S02
TCM self-diagnosis EURO-OBD (DTC)

Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAG-
NOSIS” test mode)
Malfunction is detected when ... Available by
Available by malfunction
O/D OFF indicator*2,
“A/T” “ENGINE” indicator lamp “ENGINE” on CON-
SULT-II or GST
PNP switch circuit I TCM does not receive the cor-

rect voltage signal (based on the — P0705
— PNP SW/CIRC gear position) from the switch.
Revolution sensor I TCM does not receive the proper

voltage signal from the sensor. X P0720
VHCL SPEED VEH SPD SEN/CIR
SEN·A/T AT
Vehicle speed sensor (Meter) I TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the sensor. X —
VHCL SPEED
—
SEN·MTR
A/T 1st gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st

gear position even if electrical — P0731*1
— A/T 1ST GR FNCTN circuit is good.
A/T 2nd gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd

— A/T 2ND GR FNCTN circuit is good.
A/T 3rd gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd

— A/T 3RD GR FNCTN circuit is good.
A/T 4th gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th

— A/T 4TH GR FNCTN circuit is good.
AT-58

Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAG- GI
NOSIS” test mode)
Available by malfunction MA
SULT-II or GST EM
Shift solenoid valve A I TCM detects an improper volt-
age drop when it tries to operate
SHIFT SOLENOID/V SFT SOL A/CIRC the solenoid valve.
X P0750 LC
A
Shift solenoid valve B I TCM detects an improper volt-

age drop when it tries to operate
EC
SHIFT SOLENOID/V SFT SOL B/CIRC X P0755
the solenoid valve.
B
FE
Overrun clutch solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper volt-
age drop when it tries to operate X P1760
OVERRUN CLUTCH O/R CLUCH SOL/ the solenoid valve.
S/V CIRC CL
T/C clutch solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper volt-
age drop when it tries to operate X P0740 MT
T/C CLUTCH SOL/V TCC SOLENOID/ the solenoid valve.
CIRC
Line pressure solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper volt-

age drop when it tries to operate X P0745
LINE PRESSURE L/PRESS SOL/CIRC the solenoid valve.
S/V
AX
Throttle position sensor, I TCM receives an excessively
Throttle position switch low or high voltage from the sen-
X P1705
THROTTLE POSI TP SEN/CIRC A/T
sor. SU
SEN
Engine speed signal I TCM does not receive the proper BR

voltage signal from the ECM. X P0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG
A/T fluid temperature sensor I TCM receives an excessively ST

low or high voltage from the sen- X P0710
BATT/FLUID TEMP ATF TEMP SEN/ sor.
SEN CIRC
RS
TCM (RAM) I TCM memory (RAM) is malfunc-
tioning. — —
CONTROL UNIT BT
—
(RAM)
TCM (ROM) I TCM memory (ROM) is malfunc-

tioning. — —
HA
CONTROL UNIT
—
(ROM)
TCM (EEP ROM) I TCM memory (EEP ROM) is SC

malfunctioning. — —
CONT UNIT (EEP
—
ROM) EL
Initial start I This is not a malfunction mes-
sage (Whenever shutting off a
power supply to the TCM, this X — IDX
INITIAL START message appears on the
—
screen.)
AT-59

Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF DIAG-
NOSIS” test mode)
Available by malfunction
SULT-II or GST
No failure I No failure has been detected.

(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDI-
X X
CATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED**)
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
*1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MI if another malfunction is assigned to MI.
*2: Refer to EC-560, “Malfunction Indicator (MI)”.
DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) NJAT0256S03
Monitor item
signals nals
Vehicle speed sensor 1 VHCL/S SE·A/T I Vehicle speed computed When racing engine in “N”
(A/T) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of revolution or “P” position with vehicle
(Revolution sensor) X — sensor is displayed. stationary, CONSULT-II
data may not indicate 0
km/h (0 mph).
Vehicle speed sensor 2 VHCL/S SE·MTR I Vehicle speed computed Vehicle speed display may
(Meter) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of vehicle not be accurate under
speed sensor is dis- approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It
X —
played. may not indicate 0 km/h (0
mph) when vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Throttle position sensor THRTL POS I Throttle position sensor

SEN X — signal voltage is dis-
[V] played.
A/T fluid temperature sen- FLUID TEMP SE I A/T fluid temperature

sor [V] sensor signal voltage is
X — displayed.
I Signal voltage lowers as
fluid temperature rises.
Battery voltage BATTERY VOLT I Source voltage of TCM

X —
[V] is displayed.
Engine speed ENGINE SPEED I Engine speed, computed Engine speed display may
[rpm] from engine speed not be accurate under
signal, is displayed. approx. 800 rpm. It may
X X
not indicate 0 rpm even
when engine is not run-
ning.
Overdrive control switch OVERDRIVE SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of overdrive
control SW is displayed.
P/N position switch PN POSI SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of P/N posi-
tion SW is displayed.
AT-60
Monitor item
TCM input Main sig- GI
signals nals
R position switch R POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of R position MA
SW is displayed.
D position switch D POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed EM

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of D position
SW is displayed.
2 position switch 2 POSITION SW I ON/OFF status, com- LC

X —
played. EC
X —
FE
played.
ASCD cruise signal ASCD-CRUISE I Status of ASCD cruise I This is displayed even CL
[ON/OFF] signal is displayed. when no ASCD is
X — ON ... Cruising state mounted.
OFF ... Normal running MT
state
ASCD OD cut signal ASCD-OD CUT I Status of ASCD OD I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] release signal is dis- when no ASCD is
X — played. mounted.
ON ... OD released
OFF ... OD not released AX
Kickdown switch KICKDOWN SW I ON/OFF status, com- I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] puted from signal of when no kickdown
X —
kickdown SW, is dis- switch is equipped.
SU
played.
Closed throttle position CLOSED I ON/OFF status, com- BR

switch THL/SW puted from signal of
X —
[ON/OFF] closed throttle position
SW, is displayed. ST
Wide open throttle position W/O THRL/P-SW I ON/OFF status, com-
switch [ON/OFF] puted from signal of
X —
wide open throttle posi- RS
tion SW, is displayed.
Gear position GEAR I Gear position data used BT

— X for computation by TCM,
is displayed.
Selector lever position SLCT LVR POSI I Selector lever position I A specific value used for HA
data, used for computa- control is displayed if
— X
tion by TCM, is dis- fail-safe is activated due
played. to error. SC
Vehicle speed VEHICLE I Vehicle speed data,
SPEED — X used for computation by
[km/h] or [mph] TCM, is displayed.
EL
Stop lamp switch BRAKE SW I ON/OFF status are dis-
[ON/OFF] played. IDX
ON: Brake pedal is
X —
depressed.
OFF: Brake pedal is
released.
AT-61
Monitor item
signals nals
Throttle position THROTTLE I Throttle position data, I A specific value used for
POSI used for computation by control is displayed if
— X
[/8] TCM, is displayed. fail-safe is activated due
to error.
Line pressure duty LINE PRES DTY I Control value of line

[%] pressure solenoid valve,
played.
Torque converter clutch TCC S/V DUTY I Control value of torque

solenoid valve duty [%] converter clutch solenoid
— X valve, computed by
TCM from each input
signal, is displayed.
Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT S/V A I Control value of shift Control value of solenoid is
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve A, com- displayed even if solenoid
— X puted by TCM from circuit is disconnected.
each input signal, is dis- The “OFF” signal is dis-
played. played if solenoid circuit is
shorted.
Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT S/V B I Control value of shift
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve B, com-
— X puted by TCM from
played.
Overrun clutch solenoid OVERRUN/C S/V I Control value of overrun

valve [ON/OFF] clutch solenoid valve
each input signal is dis-
played.
Self-diagnosis display lamp SELF-D DP LMP I Control status of O/D

(O/D OFF indicator lamp) [ON/OFF] — X OFF indicator lamp is
displayed.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II NJAT0256S04

CONSULT-II Setting Procedure NJAT0256S0401
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector which is located
in left side lower dash panel.
SAT998J
AT-62
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT586J LC
5. Touch “A/T”.
EC
FE
CL
SAT014K
MT
6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.
AX
SU
BR
SAT971J
7. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.).

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT018K
8. Touch “START”. SC
EL
IDX
SAT589J
AT-63
9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
SAT019K
I When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen

changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
SAT591J
10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may

exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
SAT592J
SAT593J
11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance

with instructions displayed.
SAT594J
AT-64
12. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT595J LC
13. CONSULT-II procedure ended.
If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. EC
FE
CL
SAT596J
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT593J
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE NJAT0256S05 ST

DTC work support item Description Check items (Possible cause)
Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be con-
I Shift solenoid valve A RS
firmed.
I Shift solenoid valve B
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con-
I Each clutch
ducted or not)
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
I Hydraulic control circuit BT
Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be con-
firmed. I Shift solenoid valve B HA
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con- I Each clutch
ducted or not) I Hydraulic control circuit
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) SC
Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be con-
firmed. I Shift solenoid valve A
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con- I Each clutch EL
ducted or not) I Hydraulic control circuit
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
IDX
Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be con- I Shift solenoid valve A
firmed. I Shift solenoid valve B
4TH GR FNCTN P0734 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con- I Line pressure solenoid valve
ducted or not) I Each clutch
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) I Hydraulic control circuit
AT-65
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II NJAT0352

EURO-OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH
GST) NJAT0352S04
Refer to EC-580, “Generic Scan Tool (GST)”.
EURO-OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO

TOOLS) NJAT0352S05
Refer to EC-560, “Malfunction Indicator (MI)”.
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)

NJAT0352S06
Preparation NJAT0352S0601
2. Connect the handy type vacuum pump to the throttle opener
and apply vacuum −25.3 kPa (−253 mbar, −190 mmHg, −7.48
inHg).
3. Disconnect the throttle position switch harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
5. Check continuity of the closed throttle position switch.
Continuity should exist.
SAT491J
(If continuity does not exist, check throttle opener and
closed throttle position switch. Then increase vacuum
until closed throttle position switch shows continuity.)
6. Go to “Self-diagnostic procedure (Without CONSULT-II)”.
SAT851JA
AT-66
1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. GI
Wait 5 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position. MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT774B FE
6. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) CL
7. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
MT
AX
SU
SAT138K
Yes or No
BR
Yes © GO TO 2.
ST
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. RS
4. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position. BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT653E
© GO TO 3.
AT-67

SAT780B
© GO TO 4.

SAT781B
© GO TO 5.

1. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
SAT981F
© GO TO 6.
AT-68

Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-69. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT138K EC
© DIAGNOSIS END
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE FE

NJAT0352S02
O/D OFF indicator lamp:

CL
All judgement flickers are the same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others.
MT
AX
SAT437F
SAT436F Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. SU
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. ⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SEN-
SOR).
EURO-OBD: AT-196 BR
2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT439F SAT441F
Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR. ⇒ Go to THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR. SC
EURO-OBD: AT-281 EURO-OBD: AT-259
EL
IDX
AT-69
SAT445F
Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
SAT443F ⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B.
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. EURO-OBD: AT-253
⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A.
EURO-OBD: AT-247
SAT447F SAT449F
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited
nected. or disconnected.
⇒ Go to OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. ⇒ Go to TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
EURO-OBD: AT-268 VALVE.
EURO-OBD: AT-234
SAT453F
Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
SAT451F
⇒ Go to ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL.
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power EURO-OBD: AT-201
source circuit is damaged.
⇒ Go to A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND TCM
POWER SOURCE.
EURO-OBD: AT-274
AT-70
10th judgement flicker is longer than others. Flickers as shown below. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT457F
SAT455F Battery power is low.
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
EC
nected. Battery is connected conversely.
⇒ Go to LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. (When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
EURO-OBD: AT-240 FE
Lamp comes on.
CL
MT
AX
SAT367J
PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch SU
circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged.
⇒ Go to TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate.
EURO-OBD: AT-336 BR
t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —
INTRODUCTION EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Introduction
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle
position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up
control via A/T solenoid valves.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve
malfunction, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs inter-
mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
SAT631IA
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only, may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-76.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example (AT-73) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
SAT632I
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins for information.
SEF234G
AT-72
Introduction (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET =NJAT0023S01
Information from Customer
KEY POINTS
NJAT0023S0101
GI
WHAT ..... Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies MA
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
EM
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. model Engine Mileage LC

Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency l Continuous l Intermittent ( times a day) EC

Symptoms l Vehicle does not move. (l Any position l Particular position)
l No up-shift (l 1st , 2nd l 2nd , 3rd l 3rd , O/D) FE

l No down-shift (l O/D , 3rd l 3rd , 2nd l 2nd , 1st)
l Lockup malfunction CL
l Shift point too high or too low.
l Shift shock or slip (l N , D l Lockup l Any drive position) MT

l Noise or vibration
l No kickdown
l No pattern select
AX
l Others
( )
O/D OFF indicator lamp or A/T Blinks for about 8 seconds. SU

check indicator lamp
l Continuously lit l Not lit
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-73
Diagnostic Worksheet =NJAT0023S0102
1. l Read the Fail-safe and listen to customer complaints. AT-9
2. l CHECK A/T FLUID AT-83
l Leakage (Follow specified procedure)

l Fluid condition
l Fluid level
3. l Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST. AT-83, 87
l Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.
l Torque converter one-way clutch l Low & reverse brake

l Reverse clutch l Low one-way clutch
l Forward clutch l Engine
l Overrun clutch l Line pressure is low
l Forward one-way clutch l Clutches and brakes except high clutch
and brake band are OK
l Line Pressure test — Suspected parts:
4. l Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-88
4-1. Check before engine is started. AT-90
l O/D OFF or A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-294.
l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items.
l Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-127.

l Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-132.
l Throttle position sensor, AT-135.
l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-143.
l Shift solenoid valve B, AT-149.
l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-155.
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-160.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-166.
l Engine speed signal, AT-173.
l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-177.
l Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-286.
l Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-288.
l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-336.
l Battery
l Others
4-2. Check at idle AT-92
l Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” And “N” Position, AT-297.

l In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-299.
l In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-300.
l Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position, AT-302.
l Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-304.
l Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position, AT-307.
AT-74
4. 4-3. Cruise test AT-95

AT-98
Part-1 GI
l Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1, AT-310.
l A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2, AT-313.
l A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3, AT-316. MA
l A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4, AT-319.
l A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-322.
l A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-324. EM
l Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-326.
l Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3), AT-327.
LC
Part-2 AT-102
l Vehicle Does Not Start From D1, AT-329.

l A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2, AT-313. EC
Part-3 AT-104
FE
l A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3 When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”, AT-330
l Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3 ), AT-327. CL
l A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , 22, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position, AT-331.
l Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22 ), AT-327.
l A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector Lever “2” , “1” Position, AT-332. MT
l Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-334.

l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-143. AX
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-160. SU
l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-177. BR
l Battery
ST
l Others
5. l For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-41 RS
6. l Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-88
7. l Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged AT-119 BT
parts. AT-108
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders.) HA
8. l Erase self-diagnosis code from TCM memories. AT-44
AT-52
SC
EL
IDX
AT-75
Work Flow
Work Flow NJAT0024

HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR NJAT0024S01
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In
general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or
conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER” (AT-73) and “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET” (AT-74), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
WORK FLOW CHART NJAT0024S02
SAT097KC
*1: AT-73 *8: AT-40 *15: AT-108

*2: AT-74 *9: AT-40 *16: AT-44
*3: AT-9 *10: AT-52 *17: AT-52
*4: AT-83 *11: AT-128 *18: AT-128
*5: AT-83 *12: AT-178 and AT-286 to AT-288 *19: AT-178
*6: AT-87 *13: AT-294 *20: AT-286
*7: AT-88 *14: AT-336 *21: AT-288
AT-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION EURO-OBD
Introduction
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle
position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up GI
control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the EURO-OBD related MA
parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The
TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM
can store malfunctions in its memory. EM
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good
SAT631IA
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve LC
malfunction, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs inter-
mittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
EC
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the FE
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only, may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should CL
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-81.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus- MT
SAT632I
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example (AT-78) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni- AX
cally controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins for information.
SU
BR
SEF234G
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-77
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET =NJAT0257S01
Information from Customer NJAT0257S0101
KEY POINTS
WHAT ..... Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. model Engine Mileage
Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency l Continuous l Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms l Vehicle does not move. (l Any position l Particular position)
l No up-shift (l 1st , 2nd l 2nd , 3rd l 3rd , O/D)
l No down-shift (l O/D , 3rd l 3rd , 2nd l 2nd , 1st)
l Lockup malfunction
l Shift point too high or too low.
l Shift shock or slip (l N , D l Lockup l Any drive position)
l Noise or vibration
l No kickdown
l No pattern select
l Others
( )
O/D OFF indicator lamp Blinks for about 8 seconds.
l Continuously lit l Not lit
Malfunction indicator (MI) l Continuously lit l Not lit
AT-78
Diagnostic Worksheet =NJAT0257S0102
1. l Read the Fail-safe and listen to customer complaints. AT-9 GI

2. l CHECK A/T FLUID AT-83
l Leakage (Follow specified procedure) MA

l Fluid condition
l Fluid level
3. l Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST. AT-83, 87 EM

l Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.
l Torque converter one-way clutch l Low & reverse brake

LC
l Reverse clutch l Low one-way clutch
l Forward clutch l Engine
l Overrun clutch l Line pressure is low EC
l Forward one-way clutch l Clutches and brakes except high clutch and
brake band are OK
FE
l Line Pressure test — Suspected parts:
4. l Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-88

CL
4-1. Check before engine is started. AT-90
l O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-294.

l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items. MT
l PNP switch, AT-184.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-190.
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-234. AX
l Throttle position sensor, AT-259. SU
l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-274. BR
l Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-288. ST
l Battery
l Others
4-2. Check at idle AT-92

RS
l Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” And “N” Position, AT-297.
l In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-299. BT
l In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-300.
l Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position, AT-302.
l Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-304. HA
l Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position, AT-307.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-79
4. 4-3. Cruise test AT-95

AT-98
Part-1
l Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1, AT-310.

l A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-322.
l A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-324.
l Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-326.
l Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3), AT-327.
Part-2 AT-102
l Vehicle Does Not Start From D1, AT-329.

Part-3 AT-104
l A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3 When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”, AT-330
l Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3 ), AT-327.
l A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , 22, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position, AT-331.
l Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22 ), AT-327.
l A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector Lever “2” , “1” Position, AT-332.
l Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-334.
l PNP switch, AT-184.

l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-190.
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-234.
l Battery
l Others
5. l For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-58
6. l Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-88
7. l Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items. EC section
Refer to EC-546, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
l DTC (P0731) A/T 1st gear function, AT-205.

l DTC (P0732) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-212.
l DTC (P0733) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-218.
l DTC (P0734) A/T 4th gear function, AT-224.
8. l Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged AT-108
parts. AT-119
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders.)
9. l Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories. AT-55
AT-80
Work Flow
Work Flow NJAT0258

HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR NJAT0258S01
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In
GI
general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or
conditions for a customer complaint. MA
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER” (AT-78) and “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET” (AT-79), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-81
Work Flow (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW CHART NJAT0258S02
SAT183K
*1: AT-78 *7: AT-57 *13: AT-336

*2: AT-79 *8: AT-53 *14: AT-108
*3: AT-9 *9: AT-69 *15: AT-55 and AT-56
*4: AT-83 *10: AT-184 *16: AT-184
*5: AT-83 and AT-87 *11: AT-281 and AT-286 to AT-288 *17: AT-281 and AT-286 to AT-288
*6: AT-88 *12: AT-294 *18: EC-546
AT-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
A/T Fluid Check
A/T Fluid Check NJAT0025

FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK
1. Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating sur-
NJAT0025S01
GI
face of converter housing and transmission case.
2. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in “D” posi- MA
tion and wait a few minutes.
3. Stop engine.
EM
SAT767B LC
4. Check for fresh leakage.
EC
FE
CL
SAT288G
MT
FLUID CONDITION CHECK NJAT0025S02
Fluid color Suspected problem
Dark or black with burned odor Wear of frictional material

AX
Milky pink Water contamination — Road water
entering through filler tube or breather
Varnished fluid, light to dark brown Oxidation — Over or under filling, — SU

and tacky Overheating
FLUID LEVEL CHECK BR

SAT638A NJAT0025S03
Refer to “Checking A/T Fluid”, AT-15.
ST
RS
BT
HA
Stall Test NJAT0026

SC
STALL TEST PROCEDURE NJAT0026S01
1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add. EL
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach
operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature: IDX
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
SAT647B
AT-83
Stall Test (Cont’d)
3. Set parking brake and block wheels.
4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
I It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine
rpm on indicator.
SAT513G
5. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D

position.
6. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot
brake.
7. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately
release throttle.
I During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5
seconds.
Stall revolution:
QG13DE 2,000 - 2,300 rpm
SAT514G
QG15DE 2,000 - 2,300 rpm
QG16DE 2,200 - 2,700 rpm
QG18DE 2,050 - 2,500 rpm
8. Move selector lever to “N” position.

9. Cool off ATF.
I Run engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in “2”, “1” and “R”
positions.
SAT771B
JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST NJAT0026S02

The test result and possible damaged components relating to each
result are shown in the illustrations on next page.
In order to pinpoint the possible damaged components, follow the
WORK FLOW shown in AT-76 (EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD) or
AT-81 (EURO-OBD).
NOTE:
Stall revolution is too high in “D”, “2” or “1” position:
I Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. .....
Low one-way clutch slippage
I Slippage occurs in the following gears:
AT-84
1st through 3rd gears in “D” position and engine brake func-
tions with overdrive control switch set to “OFF”.
1st and 2nd gears in “2” position and engine brake functions GI
with accelerator pedal released (fully closed throttle). ..... For-
ward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage
Stall revolution is too high in R position: MA
I Engine brake does not function in “1” position. ..... Low &
reverse brake slippage
EM
I Engine brake functions in “1” position. ..... Reverse clutch slip-
page
Stall revolution within specifications: LC
I Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50
MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter housing
CAUTION: EC
Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnor-
mally.
FE
I Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in “D” position. ..... High
clutch slippage
I Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in “D” position. ..... Brake CL
band slippage
I Engine brake does not function in 2nd and 3rd gears in “D”
position, 2nd gear in “2” position, and 1st gear in “1” position MT
with overdrive control switch set to “OFF”. ..... Overrun clutch
slippage
Stall revolution less than specifications:
I Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch slippage in
torque converter AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-85
SAT871HA
AT-86
Line Pressure Test
Line Pressure Test NJAT0027

LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS NJAT0027S01
Location of line pressure test ports are shown in the illustration.
GI
I Always replace pressure plugs as they are self-sealing
bolts. MA
EM
SAT561J LC
LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE NJAT0027S02
1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid or EC
oil.
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF
reach operating temperature. FE
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
CL
SAT647B
MT
3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.
AX
SU
BR
UAT008
4. Set parking brake and block wheels.

I Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure
ST
test is being performed at stall speed.
RS
BT
HA
UAT008
5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed. SC
I When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the
stall test procedure.
Line pressure: Refer to SDS, AT-478. EL
IDX
SAT493G
AT-87
Line Pressure Test (Cont’d)
JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST NJAT0027S03
Judgement Suspected parts
Line pressure is low in all positions. I Oil pump wear

I Control piston damage
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged
I Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve
I Clogged strainer
Line pressure is low in particular I Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch
position. I For example, line pressure is:
− Low in “R” and “1” positions, but
At idle − Normal in “D” and “2” positions.
Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit.
Refer to “CLUTCH AND BAND CHART”, AT-24.
Line pressure is high. I Maladjustment of throttle position sensor

I A/T fluid temperature sensor damaged
I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
I Pressure modifier valve sticking
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Open in dropping resistor circuit
Line pressure is low. I Maladjustment of throttle position sensor

I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
At stall I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
speed I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Pressure modifier valve sticking
I Pilot valve sticking
Road Test NJAT0028

DESCRIPTION NJAT0028S01
I The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of
A/T and analyze causes of problems.
I The road test consists of the following three parts:
1. Check before engine is started
2. Check at idle
3. Cruise test
SAT786A
I Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures

and items to check.
I Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found.
Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test.
Refer to the following items.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSITC TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SYMPTOMS
EXCEPT FOR
AT-40 to AT-50 AT-294 to AT-336
EURO-OBD
SAT496G
AT-88
Road Test (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSITC TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SYMPTOMS
GI
EURO-OBD AT-53 to AT-69 AT-294 to AT-336
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-89
1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED =NJAT0028S02
1 CHECK O/D OFF or A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
4. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position (With overdrive control switch).
SAT774B
6. Does O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
SAT279K
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Stop ROAD TEST. Go to “O/D OFF or A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”,
AT-294.
AT-90
2 CHECK O/D OFF or A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

Does O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds? GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT279K EC
Yes or No
Yes (Except for EURO- © TCM is under fail-safe mode. Perform self-diagnosis and check NG items on the DIAG- FE
OBD) NOSTIC WORKSHEET, AT-73. Refer to SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (Without
CONSULT-II), AT-45.
No (Except for EURO- © 1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. CL
OBD) 2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II), AT-45.
3. Go to “CHECK AT IDLE”, AT-92. MT
Yes (EURO-OBD) © TCM is under fail-safe mode. Perform self-diagnosis and check NG items on the DIAG-
NOSTIC WORKSHEET, AT-78. Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS), AT-66.
No (EURO-OBD) © 1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items. AX
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS), AT-66.
3. Go to “CHECK AT IDLE”, AT-92.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-91
2. CHECK AT IDLE =NJAT0028S03
1 CHECK ENGINE START

3. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
SAT769B
4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
5. Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Stop ROAD TEST. Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “Engine
Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-297.
2 CHECK ENGINE START

2. Move selector lever to “D”, “1”, “2” or “R” position.
SAT770B
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
4. Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes © Stop ROAD TEST. Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “Engine
Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-297. Continue ROAD TEST.
No © GO TO 3.
AT-92
3 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT768B
EC
3. Release parking brake.
4. Push vehicle forward or backward.
5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?
FE
CL
MT
SAT796A
AX
Yes or No
Yes © Mark the box of “In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed” on SU
the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST.
No © GO TO 4. BR

ST
1. Apply parking brake.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position and start engine. RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT771B
4. Release parking brake.
EL
5. Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes or No IDX
Yes © Mark the box of “In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET.
Continue ROAD TEST.
No © GO TO 5.
AT-93
5 CHECK SHIFT SHOCK

1. Apply foot brake.
SAT797A
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
SAT772B
3. Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?
Yes or No
Yes © Mark the box of “Large Shock “N” , “R” Position” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET.
Continue ROAD TEST.
No © GO TO 6.

1. Release foot brake for several seconds.
SAT799A
2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 7.
No © Mark the box of “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position” on the DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-94

1. Move selector lever to “D”, “2” and “1” positions and check if vehicle creeps forward. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT773B
2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions?
EC
Yes or No
Yes © Go to 3. CRUISE TEST, AT-95.
FE
No © Mark the box of “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” on the
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST. CL
MT
3. CRUISE TEST NJAT0028S04
I Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3.
With CONSULT-II NJAT0028S0401
I Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result. AX
I Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place
as per Shift Schedule.
SU
BR
SAT601J
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
NJAT0028S0402 ST
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector, which is located
in left side lower dash panel. RS
BT
HA
SAT998J
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. SC

4. Touch “START”.
EL
IDX
SAT586J
AT-95
5. Touch “A/T”.
SAT014K
6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
SAT971J
7. Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”.

8. Select “Numerical Display”, “Barchart Display” or “Line Graph
Display”.
SAT175K
9. Touch “SETTING” to recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or

“MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”.
10. Touch “Start”.
SAT973J
11. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”.
SAT134K
AT-96
12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT135K LC
13. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”.
EC
FE
CL
SAT987J
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT974J
14. Touch “DISPLAY”.

15. Touch “PRINT”.
ST
16. Check the monitor data printed out.
17. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3. RS
BT
HA
SAT975J
Without CONSULT-II NJAT0028S0403

SC
I Throttle position sensor can be checked by voltage across
terminals 41 and 42 of TCM.
EL
IDX
SAT417J
AT-97
Cruise Test — Part 1 =NJAT0028S0404
1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1) POSITION

1. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
3. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position (With overdrive control switch).
SAT774B
5. Start engine.
SAT775B
7. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal halfway.
SAT495G
8. Does vehicle start from D1?
Read gear position.
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Mark the box of “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET. Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-98
2 CHECK SHIFT UP (D1 TO D2)

Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed? GI
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-473. MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT954I
Yes or No
FE
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2” on the
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST. CL
3 CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3) MT

Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-473.
AX
SU
BR
SAT955I
ST
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
RS
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET.
Continue ROAD TEST.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-99

SAT956I
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5.
Continue ROAD TEST.
5 CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U)

Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%.
Specified speed when lock-up occurs:
SAT957I
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET.
Continue ROAD TEST.
6 CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP

Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 7.
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORK-
SHEET. Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-100
7 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 L/U TO D4)

1. Release accelerator pedal. GI
2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?
MA
EM
LC
SAT958I
Yes or No
EC
Yes © GO TO 8.
No © Mark the box of “Lock-up Is Not Released” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Con- FE
tinue ROAD TEST.
CL
8 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO D3)
1. Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.
2. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3?
MT
Read gear position and engine speed.
AX
SU
SAT959I
BR
Yes or No
Yes © 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 2”, AT-102.
ST
No © Mark the box of “Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)” on the
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-101
1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1) POSITION

1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position (With overdrive control switch).
2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again.
4. Does vehicle start from D1?
Read gear position.
SAT495G
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Mark the box of “Vehicle Does Not Start From D1” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET.
Continue ROAD TEST.
2 CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3 TO D4 TO D2)

1. Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration.
2. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully.
3. Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully?
Read gear position and throttle position.
SAT404H
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2” on the
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-102

Refer to Shift Schedule, AT-473. MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT960I
Yes or No
FE
Yes © GO TO 4.
Continue ROAD TEST. CL
4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4) AND ENGINE BRAKE MT

Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3.
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT405H
Yes or No
Yes © 1. Stop vehicle.
RS
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 3”, AT-104.
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. BT
Continue ROAD TEST.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-103
1 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO D3) (WITH OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH)

1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position.
2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4.
SAT812A
4. Release accelerator pedal.
SAT813A
5. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position while driving in D4.
6. Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)?
Read gear position and vehicle speed.
SAT776BA
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” ,
“OFF” on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-104
2 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE (WITH OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH)

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT776BA EC
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3. FE
CL
3 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D3 TO 22) (WITH OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH)
1. Move selector lever from “D” to “2” position while driving in D3 (O/D OFF).
MT
2. Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to 22?
Read gear position.
AX
SU
BR
SAT791GA
ST
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
RS
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D2, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position”
on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-105
4 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE (WITH OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH)

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
SAT791GA
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5.
5 CHECK SHIFT DOWN

1. Move selector lever from “2” to “1” position while driving in 22.
2. Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position?
Read gear position.
SAT778B
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Mark the box of “A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector lever “2” , “1” Position”
on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-106
6 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT778B EC
Yes or No
Yes © 1. Stop vehicle. FE
2. Perform self-diagnosis. EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD: Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)”, AT-45/EURO-OBD: Refer to “TCM SELF-DI-
AGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-66. CL
No © Mark the box of “Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake” on the DIAGNOSTIC
WORKSHEET. Stop ROAD TEST.
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-107
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart NJAT0029

Numbers are arranged in order of inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
Reference Page
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item EXCEPT

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD
EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY

1. Ignition switch and starter ROUTING” and SC-13,
Engine cannot start in “P” and “N” “STARTING SYSTEM”
positions. ON vehicle
AT-297 2. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
3. PNP switch AT-336 AT-184
Engine starts in position other than 1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +

“N” and “P” positions. ON vehicle
AT-297 2. PNP switch AT-336 AT-184
1. Fluid level AT-83 +
2. Line pressure test AT-87 +

ON vehicle 3. Throttle position sensor AT-135 AT-259
Transaxle noise in “P” and “N”
positions. 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196,
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281
5. Oil pump AT-387 +

OFF vehicle
6. Torque converter AT-369 +
Vehicle moves when changing into ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
“P” position, or parking gear does
not disengage when shifted out of
“P” position. AT-364,
OFF vehicle 2. Parking components AT-365
AT-299 AT-365
ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
Vehicle runs in “N” position. 2. Forward clutch AT-415 +

AT-300 OFF vehicle 3. Reverse clutch AT-406 +
4. Overrun clutch AT-415 +
1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
2. Stall test AT-83 +
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-87 +
4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-177 AT-240

Vehicle will not run in “R” position
(but runs in “D”, “2” and “1” posi- 5. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
tions). Clutch slips.
Very poor acceleration. 6. Reverse clutch AT-406 +
AT-304
7. High clutch AT-410 +
OFF vehicle 8. Forward clutch AT-415 +
10. Low & reverse brake AT-422 +
AT-108
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Reference Page
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item EXCEPT GI

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD
1. Fluid level AT-83 + MA

ON vehicle EM
Vehicle braked when shifting into 4. Control valve assembly AT-354 +

“R” position. LC
6. Brake band AT-440 +

OFF vehicle EC
7. Forward clutch AT-415 +

FE
EC-274, “Idle EC-989, “Idle
Speed and Speed and
1. Engine idling rpm
Ignition Tim- Ignition Tim- CL
ing” ing”
2. Throttle position sensor AT-135 AT-259

MT
Sharp shock in shifting from “N” to ON vehicle
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-166 AT-190
“D” position.
5. Engine speed signal AT-173 AT-201
6. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-177 AT-240 AX

7. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
8. Accumulator N-D AT-354 + SU

OFF vehicle 9. Forward clutch AT-415 +
Vehicle will not run in “D” and “2” ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 + BR
positions (but runs in “1” and “R” AT-362,
positions). OFF vehicle 2. Low one-way clutch AT-363
AT-363
ST
2. Stall test AT-83 +

RS
ON vehicle
4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-177 AT-240 BT
Vehicle will not run in “D”, “1”, “2” 5. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
positions (but runs in “R” position).
Clutch slips. Very poor accelera-
6. Accumulator N-D AT-354 + HA
tion. 7. Reverse clutch AT-406 +
AT-307
8. High clutch AT-410 + SC
OFF vehicle
10. Forward one-way clutch AT-426 + EL
AT-362,
11. Low one-way clutch AT-363
AT-363 IDX
AT-109
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD
ON vehicle 6. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
7. Accumulator N-D AT-354 +
Clutches or brakes slip somewhat 8. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247

in starting. 9. Shift solenoid valve B AT-149 AT-253
10. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-155 AT-268
11. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-160 AT-234
13. Reverse clutch AT-406 +
OFF vehicle 14. Low & reverse brake AT-422 +

Speed and Speed and
Excessive creep. ON vehicle 1. Engine idling rpm
Ignition Tim- Ignition Tim-
ing” ing”
ON vehicle 2. Line pressure test AT-87 +
No creep at all. 3. Control valve assembly AT-354 +

AT-304 and AT-307 4. Forward clutch AT-415 +
OFF vehicle 5. Oil pump AT-387 +
2. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247

Failure to change gear from “D1” to ON vehicle
“D2”. 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196,
OFF vehicle 6. Brake band AT-440 +
AT-110
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD
1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 + MA

2. Shift solenoid valve B AT-149 AT-253

EM
ON vehicle
Failure to change gear from “D2” to 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196,
“D3”. sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281 LC
6. High clutch AT-410 + EC

OFF vehicle
1. PNP switch AT-336 AT-184 FE

2. Overdrive control switch AT-336 +

CL
Failure to change gear from “D3” to ON vehicle
“D4”. 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196,
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281 MT

Too high a gear change point from 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196, AX
“D1” to “D2”, from “D2” to “D3”, from sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281
ON vehicle
“D3” to “D4”.
AT-313, AT-316 and AT-319 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247 SU
1. Fluid level AT-83 + BR

Gear change directly from “D1” to ON vehicle
2. Accumulator servo release AT-354 +
“D3” occurs.
OFF vehicle 3. Brake band AT-440 + ST
Speed and Speed and
RS
ing” ing”
ON vehicle
Engine stops when shifting lever 2. Fluid level AT-83 + BT
into “R”, “D”, “2” and “1”.
4. Control valve assembly AT-354 + HA

OFF vehicle 5. Torque converter AT-369 +
1. Throttle position sensor AT-135 AT-259 SC

ON vehicle 3. Accumulator servo release AT-354 +

EL
Too sharp a shock in change from
“D1” to “D2”. 4. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
IDX
AT-111
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD

ON vehicle
Too sharp a shock in change from 3. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
“D2” to “D3”. 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-166 AT-190

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle
Too sharp a shock in change from 3. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
“D3” to “D4”. 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-166 AT-190

OFF vehicle
Almost no shock or clutches slip- ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-87 +

ping in change from “D1” to “D2”. 4. Accumulator servo release AT-354 +

ON vehicle
Almost no shock or slipping in 3. Line pressure test AT-87 +
change from “D2” to “D3”. 4. Control valve assembly AT-354 +

OFF vehicle

Almost no shock or slipping in ON vehicle
change from “D3” to “D4”.
ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-83 +
Vehicle braked by gear change 3. Low & reverse brake AT-422 +

from “D1” to “D2”. OFF vehicle 4. High clutch AT-410 +
AT-362,
AT-363
AT-112
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD
ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-83 + MA

Vehicle braked by gear change
from “D2” to “D3”. OFF vehicle 2. Brake band AT-440 +

EM
Vehicle braked by gear change 2. Overrun clutch AT-415 +

from “D3” to “D4”. LC
OFF vehicle 3. Forward one-way clutch AT-426 +

EC

FE
ON vehicle 4. Throttle position sensor AT-135 AT-259

CL
6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-149 AT-253 MT

Maximum speed not attained.
Acceleration poor.
10. Brake band AT-440 + AX

OFF vehicle
12. Oil pump AT-387 + SU

1. Fluid level AT-83 + BR


ST
ON vehicle
Failure to change gear from “D4” to 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247
“D3”. RS

BT
OFF vehicle
HA

SC
ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247
Failure to change gear from “D3” to
“D2” or from “D4” to “D2”. EL
OFF vehicle
6. High clutch AT-410 + IDX
AT-113
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD

Failure to change gear from “D2” to
“D1” or from “D3” to “D1”. 5. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
AT-362,
AT-363
OFF vehicle

Gear change shock felt during 2. Line pressure test AT-87 +
deceleration by releasing accelera- ON vehicle
tor pedal. 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-155 AT-268
Too high a change point from “D4” 1. Throttle position sensor AT-135 AT-259
to “D3”, from “D3” to “D2”, from “D2” ON vehicle 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196,
to “D1”. sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281
Kickdown does not operate when 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196,
depressing pedal in “D4” within ON vehicle sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281
kickdown vehicle speed. 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247
1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196,

Kickdown operates or engine over-
runs when depressing pedal in “D4” 2. Throttle position sensor AT-135 AT-259
ON vehicle
beyond kickdown vehicle speed
limit. 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247

ON vehicle
Races extremely fast or slips in 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-177 AT-240
changing from “D4” to “D3” when
depressing pedal. 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247

OFF vehicle
AT-114
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD


EM
ON vehicle 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-177 AT-240
Races extremely fast or slips in
LC
depressing pedal. 6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-149 AT-253
EC

FE
OFF vehicle 9. High clutch AT-410 +

CL
2. Throttle position sensor AT-135 AT-259 MT

ON vehicle
Races extremely fast or slips in 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-177 AT-240
depressing pedal. 5. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
6. Shift solenoid valve B AT-149 AT-253 AX

OFF vehicle
8. High clutch AT-410 + SU
2. Throttle position sensor AT-135 AT-259 BR

ON vehicle 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-177 AT-240

ST
Races extremely fast or slips in 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247

changing from “D4” or “D3” to “D1” RS
when depressing pedal.
BT
9. Forward one-way clutch AT-426 +

OFF vehicle HA
AT-362,
AT-363

SC
ON vehicle
EL
Vehicle will not run in any position. 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-177 AT-240
IDX
7. Parking components AT-449 +
AT-115
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD
Transaxle noise in “D”, “2”, “1” and ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-83 +
“R” positions. OFF vehicle 2. Torque converter AT-369 +
Failure to change from “D3” to “22” 2. Shift solenoid valve B AT-149 AT-253
when changing lever into “2” posi- ON vehicle
tion.
AT-327 4. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
Gear change from “22” to “23” in “2” 1. PNP switch AT-336 AT-184
ON vehicle
position. 2. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +

ON vehicle
Engine brake does not operate in sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281
“1” position.
AT-329

OFF vehicle
Gear change from “11” to “12” in “1” 1. PNP switch AT-336 AT-184
ON vehicle
position. 2. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +

ON vehicle sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281

Does not change from “12” to “11”
in “1” position.
AT-362,
AT-363
OFF vehicle
Large shock changing from “12” to ON vehicle 1. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
“11” in “1” position. OFF vehicle 2. Low & reverse brake AT-422 +
AT-116
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD

Speed and Speed and EM
ing” ing”
ON vehicle LC

EC
Transaxle overheats. FE

CL

OFF vehicle MT
14. Torque converter AT-369 + AX

2. Reverse clutch AT-406 + SU

ATF shoots out during operation.
White smoke emitted from exhaust 4. Brake band AT-440 + BR
pipe during operation. OFF vehicle
6. Overrun clutch AT-415 + ST

ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-83 + RS

3. Oil pump AT-387 + BT

Offensive smell at fluid charging
HA
pipe. OFF vehicle
SC

EL
IDX
AT-117
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD

3. Engine speed signal AT-173 AT-201

ON vehicle
Torque converter is not locked up. 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-166 AT-190

ON vehicle
Torque converter clutch piston slip. 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-160 AT-234
Lock-up point is extremely high or 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-127, AT-196,
low. ON vehicle sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-132 AT-281
AT-322 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-160 AT-234

ON vehicle
A/T does not shift to “D4” when 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-143 AT-247
driving with overdrive control switch
“ON”.

OFF vehicle
AT-118
Reference Page

FOR EURO- EURO-OBD
OBD

Engine is stopped at “R”, “D”, “2”
EM
and “1” positions.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TCM Terminals and Reference Value NJAT0030
PREPARATION NJAT0030S01
I Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48
by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”. AX
SU
BR
SAT216J
TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT NJAT0030S02

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT999J
SC
EL
IDX
AT-119
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
TCM INSPECTION TABLE =NJAT0030S03
(Data are reference values.)
Judgement
Terminal
Wire color Item Condition standard
No.
(Approx.)
When releasing accelerator pedal

1.5 - 2.5V
Line pressure after warming up engine.
1 R/W
solenoid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0V
fully after warming up engine.
Line pressure When releasing accelerator pedal

5 - 14V
solenoid valve after warming up engine.
2 P/B
(with dropping When depressing accelerator pedal
resistor) 0V
When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V

Torque converter
3 GY/R clutch solenoid
valve When A/T does not perform lock-
0V
up.
5 *2 Y/R — — —
6 *2 Y/G — — —
7 *2 Y/B — — —
8 *2 BR/W — — —
9 *2 G/Y — — —
When turning ignition switch to

Battery voltage
“ON”.
10 BR/R Power source
0V
“OFF”.
When shift solenoid valve A oper-

ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in “D1” or “D4”.)
11 L/W
valve A When shift solenoid valve A does
not operate. 0V
(When driving in “D2” or “D3”.)
When shift solenoid valve B oper-

12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does
not operate. 0V
AT-120
Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) GI
When setting overdrive control or
O/D OFF or A/T 0V
A/T check switch in “OFF” position. MA
13 G/R check indicator
lamp When setting overdrive control or
Battery voltage
A/T check switch in “ON” position.
EM
15 *2 PU — — —

after warming up engine. LC
I Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (Without
CONSULT-II)”, AT-45 — Except Battery voltage EC
for EURO-OBD.
I Refer to “TCM SELF DIAGNOS-
Closed throttle TIC PROCEDURE (NO FE
position switch TOOLS)”, AT-66 — EURO-OBD.
16 Y/PU
(in throttle position When depressing accelerator pedal
switch) after warming up engine. CL
I Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (Without
CONSULT-II)”, AT-45 — Except 0V MT
for EURO-OBD.
I Refer to “TCM SELF DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)”, AT-66 — EURO-OBD.
When depressing accelerator pedal

Wide open throttle more than half-way after warming Battery voltage AX
position switch up engine.
17 LG
(in throttle position
switch) When releasing accelerator pedal
0V SU
after warming up engine.
BR
19 BR/R Power source Same as No. 10
ST
When overrun clutch solenoid valve
Battery voltage
Overrun clutch
operates. RS
20 L/B
solenoid valve
0V
does not operate.
BT
When setting overdrive control or
Battery voltage
Overdrive control A/T check switch in “ON” position
22 OR/B or A/T check HA
switch When setting overdrive control or
0V
A/T check switch in “OFF” position
SC
EL
IDX
AT-121
Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
25 B Ground — —
When setting selector lever to “1”

Battery voltage
PNP switch “1” position.
26 BR/Y
position When setting selector lever to other
0V
positions.

Battery voltage
27 L
0V
positions.

Battery voltage
“OFF”.
Power source
28 R/B or
(Memory back-up)
Battery voltage
“ON”.
When moving at 20 km/h (12

MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse
frequency measuring function.*1
CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link 150 Hz
29 W Revolution sensor cable to the vehicle diagnosis
connector.
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used
to test this item.
Under 1.3V or
When vehicle parks.
over 4.5V
30 *3 G/B — — —
31 *3 GY/L — — —
Throttle position
32 R sensor — 4.5 - 5.5V
(Power source)
When setting selector lever to “D”

Battery voltage
PNP switch “D” position.
34 W/G
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “R”

Battery voltage
PNP switch “R” position.
35 G/W
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “N”

Battery voltage
PNP switch “N” or or “P” position.
36 G
“P” position When setting selector lever to other
0V
positions.
I Refer to EC-97, “ECM INSPEC-

TION TABLE” — Except for
Engine speed sig-
39 L/OR EURO-OBD. —
nal
I Refer to EC-613, “ECM INSPEC-
TION TABLE” — EURO-OBD.
AT-122
Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) GI
Voltage varies
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 MA
Vehicle speed between less
40 PU/R km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or
sensor than 1V and
more.
more than 4.5V
EM
When depressing accelerator pedal Fully-closed
Throttle position slowly after warming up engine. throttle: 0.5V
41 GY
sensor (Voltage rises gradually in Fully-open LC
response to throttle position.) throttle: 4V
Throttle position
42 B sensor — — EC
(Ground)
When depressing brake pedal. Battery voltage FE

45 R/Y Stop lamp switch
When releasing brake pedal. 0V
When ATF temperature is 20°C

1.5V
CL
A/T fluid tempera- (68°F).
47 BR
ture sensor When ATF temperature is 80°C
(176°F).
0.5V MT
48 B Ground — —
*2: These terminals are connected to the ECM (Terminal No. 15 is for EURO-OBD only).
*3: These terminals are connected to the data link connector.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN NJAT0031
HAT090
AT-124
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NJAT0031S01
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Judgement stan-
GI
Terminal
Wire color Item Condition dard
No.
(Approx.)
MA
Battery voltage
“ON”.
10 BR/R Power source EM
0V
“OFF”.
19 BR/R Power source Same as No. 10 LC

25 B Ground — —

EC
Battery voltage
“OFF”.
Power source
28 R/B or FE
(Memory back-up)
Battery voltage
“ON”.
CL
48 B Ground — — MT
AX
SU
BR
Diagnostic Procedure NJAT0231 ST

1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. RS
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT611J
OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.
AT-125
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2

1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.
SAT612JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between battery, ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28
I Fuse
I Ignition switch
Refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.
4 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram — AT — MAIN.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
AT-126
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR) EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Description
Description NJAT0038
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear park-
ing pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent GI
to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
MA
EM
SAT357H LC
EC
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) FE
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH),
use the CONSULT-II pulse fre-
quency measuring function.*1 CL
CAUTION:
29 W Revolution sensor cable to the vehicle diagnosis MT
connector.
to test this item.
Under 1.3V or
When vehicle parks.
over 4.5V
AX
Throttle position
42 B sensor — — SU
(Ground)
BR
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NJAT0038S02
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check items (Possible cause) ST
: VHCL SPEED SEN·AT I Harness or connectors
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
: 1st judgement flicker signal from the sensor.
I Revolution sensor RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-127
Description (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NJAT0038S04
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
1) Start engine.
2) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-
II.
3) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 30
km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full
SAT014K
throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.
1) Start engine.
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without
CONSULT-II)”, AT-45.
SAT806H
AT-128
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T NJAT0201
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT091
AT-129
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure NJAT0039
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
SAT014K
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
MTBL0575
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
I Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and revolution sensor
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and revolution sensor
AT-130
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Self-diagnosis Code confirmation procedure, AT-128. GI
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END MA
NG © GO TO 4.
EM
4 CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. LC
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-131
VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR·MTR EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Description
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer
assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revo-
lution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a
signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.
SAT059K

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
Voltage varies
Vehicle speed When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h between less
40 PU/R
sensor (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. than 1V and more
than 4.5V
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check items (Possible cause)
: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR I Harness or connectors

TCM does not receive the proper voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
: 2nd judgement flicker signal from the sensor. I Combination meter
I Vehicle speed sensor

NJAT0079S04
1) Start engine.
II.
Selector lever in “D” position and vehicle speed higher than 20
km/h (12 MPH).
SAT014K
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D” position and vehicle speed higher than 20
km/h (12 MPH).
SAT807H
AT-132
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR NJAT0215
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT076
AT-133
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
SAT614J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
Voltage:
Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V.
SAT465JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following items:
I Combination meter
Refer to EL-185, “METERS AND GAUGES”.
I Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor
I Harness for short or open between TCM and combination meter
I Harness for short or open between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
2 CHECK DTC
Perform Self-diagnosis Code confirmation procedure, AT-132.
OK or NG
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
AT-134
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Description
I Throttle position sensor
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position GI
and sends a signal to the TCM.
I Throttle position switch
Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed
MA
throttle position switch.
The wide open throttle position switch sends a signal to the
TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full
EM
throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends a
SAT004K signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed. LC
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NJAT0070S01
EC
Monitor item Condition Specification
FE
Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V
CL
MT
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
Closed throttle When releasing accelerator pedal

Battery voltage
position switch after warming up engine.
16 Y/PU
(in throttle posi-
AX
tion switch) 0V
When depressing accelerator pedal SU

Wide open
throttle position more than half-way after warming Battery voltage
17 LG switch up engine.
(in throttle posi-
BR
tion switch) 0V
Throttle position ST
32 R sensor — 4.5 - 5.5V
(Power source)
RS
Fully-closed
When depressing accelerator pedal throttle:
Throttle position slowly after warming up engine. 0.5V
41 GY
sensor (Voltage rises gradually in response Fully-open
BT
to throttle position.) throttle:
4V
HA
Ground
42 B (Throttle position — —
sensor) SC
EL
: THROTTLE POSI SEN I Harness or connectors

TCM receives an excessively low or high (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) IDX
: 3rd judgement flicker voltage from the sensor. I Throttle position sensor
AT-135
NJAT0070S05
1) Start engine.
II.
SAT014K
1) Start engine.
SAT808H
AT-136
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS NJAT0212
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT078
AT-137
1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM

I Check P code with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-48, “Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 3.
II)
NG © Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-128, “DTC P0120
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”.
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
SAT014K
3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle:
Approximately 4V
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sen-
sor circuit.
AT-138
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II GI
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly. MA
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle valve:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle valve:
EM
Approximately 4V
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT453J
MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
sor circuit.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-139
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
3. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.
MTBL0011
SAT702J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
I Throttle position switch — Refer to “Components Inspection”, AT-142.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM
AT-140
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly. MA
(After warming up engine)
EM
LC
MTBL0577
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT454JA
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check the following items: RS
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM BT
6 CHECK DTC
HA
OK or NG
SC
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- EL
nector.
IDX
AT-141
Component Inspection
Component Inspection =NJAT0072

THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH NJAT0072S01
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position) NJAT0072S0101
I Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5.
Accelerator pedal condition Continuity
Released Yes
Depressed No
SAT851JA I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-66, “Basic

Inspection”.
Wide Open Throttle Position Switch NJAT0072S0102

Released No
Depressed Yes
SAT852JA
AT-142
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Description
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM
in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and GI
throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum
position.
MA
EM
SAT322GC LC
Gear position 1 2 3 4
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)

EC
Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)
FE
CL
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) MT
11 L/W
not operate. 0V
AX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NJAT0064S02 SU

: SHIFT SOLENOID/VA TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors BR

when it tries to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
: 4th judgement flicker valve. I Shift solenoid valve A
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-143
NJAT0064S04
1) Start engine.
II.
3) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 position.
SAT014K
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 position.
SAT809H
AT-144
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A NJAT0210
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT079
AT-145
1 CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Resistance:
20 - 30Ω
SAT900JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-148.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
AT-146
2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between terminal 2 and TCM harness connector terminal 11.
Continuity should exist. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT901JB AX
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BR
3 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-147
Component Inspection NJAT0066

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A NJAT0066S01
I For removal, refer to AT-354.
Resistance Check NJAT0066S0101
I Check resistance between two terminals.
Resistance
Solenoid valve Terminal No.
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
2 Ground 20 - 30Ω
valve A
SAT021K
Operation Check NJAT0066S0102

I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
SAT022K
AT-148
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Description
position.
MA
EM
SAT322GC LC

EC
FE
CL
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) MT
12 L/Y
not operate. 0V
AX

: SHIFT SOLENOID/VB TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors BR

: 5th judgement flicker valve. I Shift solenoid valve B
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-149
NJAT0067S04
1) Start engine.
II.
3) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 position.
SAT014K
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 position.
SAT812H
AT-150
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B NJAT0211
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT080
AT-151

Resistance:
5 - 20Ω
SAT904JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
AT-152

EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT905JA AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-153

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B NJAT0069S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve B
SAT023K

SAT024K
AT-154
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Description
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the inhibitor switch, overdrive con- GI
trol switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The over-
run clutch operation will then be controlled.
MA
EM
SAT322GC LC
EC
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) FE
Battery voltage
operates.
20 L/B
Overrun clutch CL
solenoid valve
0V
does not operate.
MT
: OVERRUN CLUTCH S/V TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: 6th judgement flicker valve. I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AX
SU
BR

NJAT0073S04
ST
With CONSULT-II RS
NJAT0073S0401
1) Start engine.
2) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT- BT
II.
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “OFF” HA
position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).
SAT014K
Without CONSULT-II NJAT0073S0402 SC
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “OFF” EL
position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).
Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without IDX
SAT815H
AT-155
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV NJAT0213
HAT081
AT-156
1 CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE GI

3. Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground. MA
Resistance:
20 - 30Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT908JA
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354. MT
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-157

SAT909JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-158

OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
NJAT0075S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0075S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Overrun clutch
3 Ground 20 - 30Ω
solenoid valve
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT910JA
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT911JA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-159
Description
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the
gear in “D4”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston opera-
tion will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid tempera-
ture is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is
a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SAT322GC

MODE NJAT0055S01
Lock-up “OFF” Approximately 4%

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
" "
duty
Lock-up “ON” Approximately 94%

Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Torque converter
0V
up.
: T/C CLUTCH SOL/V TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: 7th judgement flicker valve. I T/C clutch solenoid valve
AT-160
NJAT0055S05
malfunction is eliminated. GI
1) Start engine. MA
II.
3) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 , D4 , D4 lock-up position. EM
SAT014K
1) Start engine. LC
2) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 , D4 , D4 lock-up position.
3) Perform self-diagnosis. EC
FE
CL
SAT818H
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-161
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV NJAT0207
HAT082
AT-162

Resistance:
5 - 20Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT889JA
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-354. MT
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-163

SAT890JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-164

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVENJAT0057S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0057S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Torque converter
clutch solenoid 5 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT025K
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT026K
SC
EL
IDX
AT-165
BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE) EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Description
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
SAT283HC
SAT021J

MODE NJAT0076S01
Monitor item Condition Specification (Approximately)
Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ

A/T fluid temperature sensor " " "
Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ

Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Battery voltage
“ON”.
0V
“OFF”.

Battery voltage
“OFF”.
Power source
28 R/B or
(Memory back-up)
Battery voltage
“ON”.
Ground
42 B (A/T fluid tempera- — —
ture sensor)

1.5V
47 BR
0.5V
(176°F).
AT-166
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check items (Possible cause) GI
: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN I Harness or connectors
TCM receives an excessively low or high
voltage from the sensor. MA
: 8th judgement flicker I A/T fluid temperature sensor
EM
LC
NJAT0076S05
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the EC
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
NJAT0076S0501
FE
II. CL
SAT014K
km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full open MT
position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driving for
more than 10 minutes.
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions: AX
km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full open
position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driving for SU
more than 10 minutes.
Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without BR
SAT821H
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-167
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS NJAT0214
HAT083
AT-168
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE GI

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. MA
Voltage:
Battery voltage
Voltage:
Battery voltage LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT461J MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I Harness for short or open between battery, ignition switch and TCM
I Ignition switch and fuse
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-169
2 CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

3. Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold.
Resistance:
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
Approximately 2.5 kΩ
SAT912JA
OK or NG
II)
NG © 1. Remove oil pan.
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following item:
I Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly
I Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC-108, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY”.
AT-170
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.
Voltage: MA
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT463J
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. CL
Continuity should exist. MT
AX
SU
SAT464J BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
I Ground circuit for ECM RS
BT
5 CHECK DTC
HA
OK or NG
SC
nector.
EL
IDX
AT-171

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR NJAT0078S01
I Check resistance between two terminals while changing tem-
perature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance
20 (68) Approximately 2.5 kΩ

SAT298F
AT-172
ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD
Description
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
GI
Judgement stan-
MA
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
EM
Engine speed Refer to EC-97, “ECM INSPECTION LC

39 L/OR —
signal TABLE”.
EC
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause) FE
: ENGINE SPEED SIG TCM does not receive the proper voltage I Harness or connectors
: 9th judgement flicker signal from ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) CL
MT
NJAT0041S04
With CONSULT-II NJAT0041S0401 AX
1) Start engine.
II. SU
km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full BR
SAT014K
ST
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 10 RS
BT
CONSULT-II)”, AT-45. HA
SAT823H
SC
EL
IDX
AT-173
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS NJAT0202
HAT095
AT-174
1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM GI

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition.
OK or NG MA
II)
EM
NG © Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-188, “DTC P1320 IGNITION
SIGNAL”. LC
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (With CONSULT-II) EC

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. FE
CL
MT
SAT014K AX
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT645J
OK or NG
BT
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check the following items: HA
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
I Resistor and ignition coil
Refer to EC-188, “DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”. SC
EL
IDX
AT-175
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (Without CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Voltage (Idle speed):
Refer to EC-97, “ECM INSPECTION TABLE”.
SAT424JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
Refer to EC-188, “DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”.
4 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-176
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
Description
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent GI
from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the
closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line MA
pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle)
should be open until the closed throttle position switch is
“OFF”. EM
SAT283HC LC
MODE
NJAT0061S01 EC
FE
Small throttle opening
(Low line pressure) Approximately 24%
Line pressure solenoid valve duty " "
Large throttle opening Approximately 95%
CL
(High line pressure)
NOTE: MT
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty
cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”.

Terminal
Judgement stan- AX
No.
(Approx.)
When releasing accelerator pedal SU

1.5 - 2.5V
Line pressure sole- after warming up engine.
1 R/W
noid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0V BR

Line pressure sole- after warming up engine.
5 - 14V ST
2 P/B noid valve (with
dropping resistor) When depressing accelerator pedal
0V
fully after warming up engine. RS
BT
: LINE PRESSURE S/V TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
when it tries to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) HA
: 10th judgement flicker valve. I Line pressure solenoid valve
SC
EL
IDX
AT-177
NJAT0061S05
1) Start engine.
II.
3) With brake pedal depressed, shift the lever from “P” , “N” ,
“D” , “N” , “P” positions.
SAT014K Without CONSULT-II NJAT0061S0502
1) Start engine.
2) With brake pedal depressed, shift the lever from “P” , “N” ,
“D” , “N” , “P” positions.
SAT824H
AT-178
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV NJAT0209
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT096
AT-179

Resistance:
2.5 - 5Ω
SAT895JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-180

3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 2.
Resistance: MA
10 - 15Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SAT896JA
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
I Dropping resistor BR
I Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-181

Resistance:
Approx. 0Ω
SAT897JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-182

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
NJAT0063S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0063S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Line pressure
4 Ground 2.5 - 5Ω
solenoid valve
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT898JA
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT899JA
DROPPING RESISTOR NJAT0063S02

SC
Resistance:
10 - 15Ω
EL
IDX
SAT003K
AT-183
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH EURO-OBD
Description
I The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range
switch.
I The transmission range switch detects the selector lever posi-
tion and sends a signal to the TCM.
SAT088JA

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Battery voltage
26 BR/Y
0V
positions.

Battery voltage
27 L
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “D”

Battery voltage
PNP switch “D” position.
34 W/G
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “R”

Battery voltage
PNP switch “R” position.
35 G/W
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “N”

Battery voltage
PNP switch “N” or or “P” position.
36 G
“P” position When setting selector lever to other
0V
positions.
: PNP SW/CIRC I Harness or connectors

TCM does not receive the correct voltage
(The PNP switch circuit is open or
signal from the switch based on the gear
: P0705 shorted.)
position.
I PNP switch
AT-184
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NJAT0264S03
CAUTION: GI
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
MA
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
EM
SAT014K malfunction is eliminated. LC
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-
EC
II.
3) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least FE
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V CL
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON” or “OFF”)
With GST
SAT020K Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-185
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW NJAT0265
HAT099
AT-186
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II) GI

With CONSULT-II
(Do not start engine.) MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT014K
3. Read out “P/N”, “R”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position.
Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. CL
MT
AX
SAT701J SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. BR
I PNP switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-189. ST
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch
I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM
I Ignition switch and fuse RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-187
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each posi-
tion.
Voltage:
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
MTBL0136
SAT425J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I PNP switch
AT-188
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-185. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM
LC
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH NJAT0267S01
EC
1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 3 and between ter-
minals 2 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through
each position. FE
Lever position Terminal No.
P 3—7 1—2 CL
R 3—8
N 3—9 1—2
MT
D 3—6
2 3—5
1 3—4
AX
SU
BR
SAT402JB
2. If NG, check again with control cable disconnected from

manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1. ST
3. If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to “Control Cable
Adjustment”, AT-355.
RS
4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check con-
tinuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-355. BT
6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
HA
SAT089JA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-189
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT EURO-OBD
Description
SAT322GC
SAT021J

MODE NJAT0268S01
Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ

Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
Throttle position
42 B sensor — —
(Ground)

1.5V
47 BR
0.5V
(176°F).
: ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC I Harness or connectors

voltage from the sensor.
: P0710 I A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-190
CAUTION: GI
NOTE:
MA
the next test.
EM
SAT014K malfunction is eliminated. LC
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. EC
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continu- FE
ously.)
CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more CL
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
SAT020K
With GST MT
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-191
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS NJAT0269
HAT100
AT-192
1 INSPECTION START GI
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
EM
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (With CONSULT-II)
LC
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT014K
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT614J
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
BT
NG © GO TO 5.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-193
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Without CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
SAT937J
5. Check continuity between terminal 42 and ground.
SAT421J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 5.
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-191.
OK or NG
nector.
AT-194

Resistance: MA
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT880JA
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
MT
AX
Check the following items: SU
I Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly
Refer to EC-625, “WIRING DIAGRAM”, “Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit”. BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
ST
RS
BT
HA

SC
I For removal, refer to AT-354. EL
IDX

SAT298F
AT-195
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR) EURO-OBD
Description
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear park-
ing pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent
to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
SAT357H

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH),

use the CONSULT-II pulse fre-
quency measuring function.*1
CAUTION:
29 W Revolution sensor cable to the vehicle diagnosis
connector.
to test this item.
Under 1.3V or
When vehicle parks.
over 4.5V
Throttle position
42 B sensor — —
(Ground)
: VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT I Harness or connectors

TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from the sensor.
: P0720 I Revolution sensor
AT-196
CAUTION: GI
I Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer. MA
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- EM
SAT014K the next test. LC
With CONSULT-II EC
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. FE
2) Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”
value increase.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, CL
AT-282.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
SAT971J 3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT- MT
II.
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) AX
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test. SU
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-199.
If the check result is OK, go to following step. BR
SAT014K
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive
seconds. ST
CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) RS
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
required for this test. BT
With GST
HA
SAT020K
SC
EL
IDX
AT-197
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T NJAT0273
HAT091
AT-198
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (With CONSULT-II) GI

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT014K FE
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
CL
MT
AX
SAT614J
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
2 CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (With CONSULT-II) ST

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
RS
BT
HA
SC
MTBL0581
OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. IDX
I Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and revolution sensor
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and revolution sensor
AT-199
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK TCM INSPECTION

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
AT-200
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL EURO-OBD
Description
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
GI
Judgement stan-
MA
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
EM
Engine speed Refer to EC-613, “ECM INSPECTION LC

39 L/OR —
signal TABLE”.
EC
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause) FE
: ENGINE SPEED SIG TCM does not receive the proper voltage I Harness or connectors
: P0725 signal from ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) CL
MT
CAUTION:
NOTE:
AX
SU
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the BR
SAT014K malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode ST
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least RS
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V BT
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. HA
SAT020K
SC
EL
IDX
AT-201
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS NJAT0277
HAT095
AT-202

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self- diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition.
OK or NG MA
II)
EM
NG © Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-947, “IGNITION SIGNAL”.
LC
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (With CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II EC
1. Start engine.
FE
CL
MT
SAT014K
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”. AX
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT645J
OK or NG
BT
OK © GO TO 4.
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM HA
Refer to EC-947, “IGNITION SIGNAL”.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-203
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (Without CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Voltage (Idle speed):
Refer to EC-613, “ECM INSPECTION TABLE”.
SAT424JC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
Refer to EC-947, “IGNITION SIGNAL”.
4 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-204
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION EURO-OBD
Description
I This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis. GI
I This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indi-
cator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
MA
I This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by EM
mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
LC
EC
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NJAT0279S01 FE

Judgement stan-
Terminal
Wire color Item Condition dard CL
No.
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve A oper- MT

11 L/W
not operate. 0V
AX
12 L/Y
Shift solenoid SU
not operate. 0V
(When driving in “D3” or “D4”.) BR
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC NJAT0279S02
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque ST
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor RS
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed BT
by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio
exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunc-
tion. HA
This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A
is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
SC
Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4
In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 EL

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open 2* 2 3 3
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4* 3 3 4 IDX
*: P0731 is detected.
AT-205
: A/T 1ST GR FNCTN I Shift solenoid valve A

A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear I Shift solenoid valve B
: P0731 position even if electrical circuit is good. I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit

CAUTION:
tachometer.
NOTE:
SAT014K the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy
of test.
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
SAT971J
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step
4)
SAT021J I Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12
to 16 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-209.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the
following step.
I Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelera-
tor pedal to WOT.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for “ENGINE”. In case a
AT-206
1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle. GI
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.)
MA
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
Vehicle condition
screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists 1,2,3,4

EM
Malfunction for P0731 2,2,3,3
exists. 4,3,3,4
LC
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer

to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
EC
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-209.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-473. FE
With GST
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-207
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST NJAT0280
HAT101
AT-208
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE GI

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.
I Shift solenoid valve A MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SAT881JB
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-209
2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-391.
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair control valve assembly.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG © Check transaxle inner parts (clutch, brake, etc.).

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B NJAT0282S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
2 20 - 30Ω
valve A
Ground
Shift solenoid
1 5 - 20Ω
valve B
SAT050KA
AT-210
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground. GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT883JB
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-211
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION EURO-OBD
Description
self-diagnosis.
second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not
caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but
by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc.

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

12 L/Y
not operate. 0V

This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) sup-
posed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the
ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis mal-
function.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck
open.
In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4 3* 3 4
: A/T 2ND GR FNCTN I Shift solenoid valve B

A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear
I Each clutch
position even if electrical circuit is good.
: P0732 I Hydraulic control circuit
AT-212
CAUTION: GI
tachometer. MA
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
of test. EC
With CONSULT-II FE
CONSULT-II. CL
SAT971J
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V MT
the fluid).
3) Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
4) Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 MPH) under the AX
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step SU
4)
BR
SAT021J I Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 50 to 55 km/h (31 ST
to 34 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to RS
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
following step. BT
tor pedal to WOT.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long HA
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. SC
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting EL
Vehicle condition
IDX
Malfunction for P0732

4,3,3,4
exists.
AT-213
Refer to shift schedule, AT-473.
With GST
AT-214
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND NJAT0284
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT102
AT-215
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

SAT884JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.

SAT367H
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
AT-216
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
EM
LC
EC
Resistance Check NJAT0286S0101 FE
Resistance
(Approx.)
CL
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve B MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT051KA
Operation Check
I
NJAT0286S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT884JB
AT-217
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION EURO-OBD
Description
self-diagnosis.
third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by
mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston
or brake band, etc.

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

11 L/W
not operate. 0V

If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed
by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio
exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunc-
tion.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck
closed.
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed 1 1 4* 4
: A/T 3RD GR FNCTN I Shift solenoid valve A

A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear
I Each clutch
: P0733 I Hydraulic control circuit
AT-218
CAUTION: GI
tachometer. MA
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
of test. EC
With CONSULT-II FE
CONSULT-II. CL
SAT971J
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V MT
the fluid).
3) Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
4) Accelerate vehicle to 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) under the AX
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step SU
4)
BR
SAT021J I Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 ST
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to RS
following step. BT
tor pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long HA
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. SC
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting EL
Vehicle condition
IDX
No malfunction exists. 1,2,3,4
Malfunction for P0733 exists. 1,1,4,4
AT-219
Refer to shift schedule, AT-473.
With GST
AT-220
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD NJAT0288
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT103
AT-221
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to “Component Inspection” below.
SAT886JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.

SAT367H
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
AT-222
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
EM
LC
EC
Resistance Check NJAT0290S0101 FE
Resistance
(Approx.)
CL
Shift solenoid
2 Ground 20 - 30Ω
valve A MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT052KA
Operation Check
I
NJAT0290S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT886JB
AT-223
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION EURO-OBD
Description
self-diagnosis.
fourth gear position or line pressure is low as instructed by the
TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open
or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunction-
ing oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.

MODE NJAT0291S01


Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

1.5 - 2.5V
1 R/W
0V

5 - 14V
2 P/B
resistor) 0V

11 L/W
not operate. 0V

12 L/Y
not operate. 0V
AT-224
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: GI
B: Engine speed signal from ECM MA
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th)
supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In EM
case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this
diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck LC
open or shift solenoid B is stuck closed.
Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 EC
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open 2 2 3 3* FE

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed 1 2 2 1*
*: P0734 is detected. CL
And also, this malfunction will be caused when line pressure is
lower than normal such as line pressure solenoid valve stuck open. MT
: A/T 4TH GR FNCTN I Shift solenoid valve A

A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear
: P0734 I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-225
CAUTION:
I If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
5 seconds before continuing.
tachometer.
NOTE:
SAT014K If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
of test.
With CONSULT-II
SAT971J
CONSULT-II.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
the fluid).
3) Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
4) Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH) under the
pletely.
SAT021J THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step
4)
I Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34
MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
following step.
tor pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
AT-226

Vehicle condition
GI
2,2,3,3
Malfunction for P0734 exists. MA
1,2,2,1
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer EM

Refer to shift schedule, AT-473. LC
With GST
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-227
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH NJAT0292
HAT104
AT-228
1 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4) GI

During “Cruise test — Part 1” (AT-98), does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT988H
Yes or No FE
Yes © GO TO 9.
No © GO TO 2. CL
2 CHECK LINE PRESSURE

MT
Perform line pressure test.
Refer to AT-87.
AX
MTBL1598
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 6. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-229
3 CHECK SOLENOID VALVES

1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-354.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-233.
SAT847JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.

1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-391.
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair control valve.
AT-230

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. MA
EM
6 CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-354. LC
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-233.
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT888JA
OK or NG ST
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-231

1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-391.
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
I Pressure regulator valve
I Pilot valve
I Pressure modifier valve
SAT367H
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair control valve.

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 9.
No © Check transaxle inner parts (clutch, brake, etc.).
9 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG © Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group.
AT-232

SOLENOID VALVES
NJAT0294S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0294S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Shift solenoid
2 20 - 30Ω
valve A
LC
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve B
Line pressure
EC
4 2.5 - 5Ω
solenoid valve
FE
CL
SAT848JB
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT847JB
SC
EL
IDX
AT-233
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE EURO-OBD
Description
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the
gear in “D4”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston opera-
tion will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid tempera-
ture is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is
a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SAT322GC

MODE NJAT0295S01
Lock-up “OFF” Approximately 4%

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
" "
duty
Lock-up “ON” Approximately 94%

Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Torque converter
0V
up.
: TCC SOLENOID/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors

: P0740 valve. I T/C clutch solenoid valve
AT-234
VALVE EURO-OBD
NOTE: GI
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting MA
the next test.
EM
With CONSULT-II
SAT014K 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) LC
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II and wait at least 1 second.
3) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least EC
THROTTLE POSI: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8
FE
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased CL
required for this test.
SAT020K
With GST MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-235
VALVE EURO-OBD
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV NJAT0296
HAT082
AT-236
VALVE EURO-OBD

Resistance:
5 - 20Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT889JB
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-354. MT
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-237
VALVE EURO-OBD

SAT890JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-238
VALVE EURO-OBD

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVENJAT0298S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0298S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Torque converter
clutch solenoid 5 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT053KA
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT054KA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-239
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE EURO-OBD
Description
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent
from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the
closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line
pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle)
should be open until the closed throttle position switch is
“OFF”.
SAT322GC

MODE NJAT0299S01

NOTE:
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty
cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”.

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

1.5 - 2.5V
1 R/W
0V

5 - 14V
2 P/B
resistor) 0V
: L/PRESS SOL/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors

: P0745 valve. I Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-240
NOTE: GI
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting MA
the next test.
EM
With CONSULT-II
SAT014K 1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode LC
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 5 sec-
onds. EC
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. FE
CL
SAT020K
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-241
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV NJAT0300
HAT096
AT-242

Resistance:
2.5 - 5Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT895JB
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-243

Resistance:
10 - 15Ω
SAT896JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I Dropping resistor
I Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly
AT-244

Resistance:
Approx. 0Ω MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT897JB AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-245

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE NJAT0302S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Line pressure
4 Ground 2.5 - 5Ω
solenoid valve
SAT898JB

SAT899JB
DROPPING RESISTOR NJAT0302S02

Resistance:
10 - 15Ω
SAT003K
AT-246
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A EURO-OBD
Description
position.
MA
EM
SAT322GC LC

EC
FE
CL
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) MT
11 L/W
not operate. 0V
AX

: SFT SOL A/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors BR
: P0750 valve. I Shift solenoid valve A
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-247
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift
“1” , “2” (“GEAR”).
With GST
SAT020K
AT-248
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A NJAT0304
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT079
AT-249

Resistance:
20 - 30Ω
SAT900JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
AT-250

EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT901JC AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-251

Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
2 Ground 20 - 30Ω
valve A
SAT056KA

SAT903JB
AT-252
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B EURO-OBD
Description
position.
MA
EM
SAT322GC LC

EC
FE
CL
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) MT
12 L/Y
not operate. 0V
AX

: SFT SOL B/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors BR
: P0755 valve. I Shift solenoid valve B
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-253
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift
1 , 2 , 3 (“GEAR”).
With GST
SAT020K
AT-254
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B NJAT0308
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT080
AT-255

Resistance:
5 - 20Ω
SAT904JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
AT-256

EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT905JD AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-257

Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve B
SAT057KA

SAT907JB
AT-258
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR EURO-OBD
Description
I Throttle position sensor
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position GI
MA
EM
SAT004K signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed. LC
MODE
NJAT0311S01
EC
FE
Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V
CL
MT
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF- Battery voltage AX
Closed throttle DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No
position switch Tools)”, AT-66.
16 Y/PU
(in throttle position SU
switch) after warming up engine.
Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF- 0V
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No
BR
Tools)”, AT-66.
When depressing accelerator pedal ST

Wide open throttle more than half-way after warming Battery voltage
position switch up engine.
17 LG
(in throttle position
switch) When releasing accelerator pedal
RS
0V
Throttle position BT
32 R sensor — 4.5 - 5.5V
(Power source)
Fully-closed HA
When depressing accelerator pedal throttle:
Throttle position slowly after warming up engine. 0.5V
41 GY SC
sensor (Voltage rises gradually in response Fully-open
to throttle position.) throttle:
4V
Ground
EL
42 B (Throttle position — —
sensor)
IDX
AT-259
: TP SEN/CIRC A/T I Harness or connectors

TCM receives an excessively low or high (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
: P1705 voltage from the sensor. I Throttle position sensor

CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
1) Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following.
Refer to steps from 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-66.
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3) Check the following.
Accelerator pedal
THRTL POS SEN CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P·SW
condition
Fully released Less than 4.7V ON OFF

SAT971J
Partially
0.1 - 4.6V OFF OFF
depressed
Fully depressed 1.9 - 4.6V OFF ON

AT-263.
SAT014K
3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less
AT-263.
6) Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive
seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle
SAT020K
AT-260
With GST
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-261
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS NJAT0312
HAT093
AT-262

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control.
Refer to EC-560, “Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”.
MA
OK or NG
EM
II)
NG © Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-649, “DTC P0120 LC
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”.
EC
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener then check the following. Refer from step 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DI- FE
AGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-66.
(Do not start engine.) CL
MT
AX
SU
SAT014K
4. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.
Voltage: BR
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle: ST
Approximately 4V
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT614J
OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 4.
sor circuit. IDX
AT-263
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener then check the following. Refer to steps 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
3. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle valve:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle valve:
Approximately 4V
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position)
SAT453J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
sor circuit.
AT-264
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II GI
1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. MA
EM
LC
EC
MTBL0011
FE
CL
MT
SAT702J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
AX
I Throttle position switch — Refer to “Components Inspection”, AT-267. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-265
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
3. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.
MTBL0137
SAT454JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
6 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-266

THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position)
NJAT0314S01
GI
NJAT0314S0101
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- MA
DURE (No Tools)”, AT-66.]
EM
Released Yes
SAT851JA Depressed No LC
I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-813, “DTC
P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH”. EC
FE
CL
MT
Wide Open Throttle Position Switch NJAT0314S0102
Released No AX
Depressed Yes
SU
BR
SAT852JA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-267
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE EURO-OBD
Description
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the inhibitor switch, overdrive con-
trol switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The over-
run clutch operation will then be controlled.
SAT322GC

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Battery voltage
operates.
Overrun clutch
20 L/B
solenoid valve
0V
does not operate.
: O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P1760 valve. I Overrun clutch solenoid valve

CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SAT014K Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of
test.
With CONSULT-II
2) Start engine.
3) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
with “D” position (OD “ON”).
4) Release accelerator pedal completely with “D” position (OD
SAT020K “OFF”).
AT-268
With GST
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-269
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV NJAT0316
HAT081
AT-270

Resistance:
20 - 30Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT908JB
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-271

SAT909JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-272

OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
NJAT0318S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0318S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Overrun clutch
3 Ground 20 - 30Ω
solenoid valve
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT910JB
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT911JB
SC
EL
IDX
AT-273
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE) EURO-OBD
Description
SAT322GC
SAT021J

MODE NJAT0319S01
Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ

Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Battery voltage
“ON”.
0V
“OFF”.

Battery voltage
“OFF”.
Power source
28 R/B or
(Memory back-up)
Battery voltage
“ON”.
Ground
42 B (A/T fluid tem- — —
perature sensor)

1.5V
47 BR
0.5V
(176°F).
AT-274
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check items (Possible cause) GI
: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN I Harness or connectors
voltage from the sensor. MA
: 8th judgement flicker I A/T fluid temperature sensor
EM
LC
PROCEDURE NJAT0319S04 EC
With CONSULT-II FE
1) Start engine.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
CL
Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12
MPH). MT
SAT014K
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12
MPH).
AX
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-66. SU
BR
SAT971J
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT335HC
SC
EL
IDX
AT-275
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS NJAT0320
HAT094
AT-276
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE GI

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. MA
Voltage:
Battery voltage
Voltage:
Battery voltage LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT461J MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I Harness for short or open between battery, ignition switch and TCM
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-277

Resistance:
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
SAT912JB
OK or NG
II)
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
AT-278
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

1. Start engine.
Voltage: MA
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT463J
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. CL
Continuity should exist. MT
AX
SU
SAT464J BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
I Ground circuit for ECM RS
BT
5 CHECK DTC
HA
OK or NG
SC
nector.
EL
IDX
AT-279


SAT298F
AT-280
DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR·MTR EURO-OBD
Description
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer
assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revo- GI
lution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a
signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.
MA
EM
SAT070K LC
EC
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) FE
Voltage varies
40 PU/R
Vehicle speed When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h between less CL
sensor (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. than 1V and more
than 4.5V
MT
: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR I Harness or connectors

TCM does not receive the proper voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) AX
: 2nd judgement flicker signal from the sensor. I Combination meter
I Vehicle speed sensor
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-281
CAUTION:
I If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
5 seconds before continuing.
With CONSULT-II
SAT014K
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 16
MPH).
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D” and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16
MPH).
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
SAT971J AT-66.
SAT329HA
AT-282
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR NJAT0324

SEDAN NJAT0324S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT129
AT-283
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR (Cont’d)
HATCHBACK NJAT0324S02
HAT105
AT-284
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT614J
CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
MT
Voltage:
Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V.
AX
SU
BR
SAT465JB
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
RS
I Combination meter
Refer to EL-185, “METERS AND GAUGES”. BT
I Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor
I Harness for short or open between TCM and combination meter HA
I Harness for short or open between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
SC
2 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
EL
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. IDX
nector.
AT-285
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Description
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
SAT574J
Diagnostic Trouble Code No. Malfunction is detected when .... Check Item (Possible Cause)
: CONTROL UNIT (RAM), TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is mal-

I TCM
CONTROL UNIT (ROM) functioning.

NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
for A/T with CONSULT-II.
SAT014K 2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
SAT971J
1 INSPECTION START (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ERASE”.
© GO TO 2.
AT-286
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
2 CHECK DTC
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. GI
See above.
© GO TO 3.
MA
3 CHECK DTC AGAIN
Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM) or CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again? EM
Yes or No
Yes © Replace TCM. LC
No © INSPECTION END
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-287
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
Description
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
SAT574J
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)
: CONT UNIT (EEP ROM) TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunction-

I TCM
ing.

NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
for A/T with CONSULT-II.
SAT014K 2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
SAT971J
AT-288
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
1 CHECK DTC GI
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position. MA
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position).
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position for 10 seconds. EM
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See previous page.
Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again?
LC
Yes © Replace TCM.
No © INSPECTION END EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-289
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/Except for EURO-OBD
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/Except for

EURO-OBD NJAT0353
GAT099A
AT-290
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/Except for EURO-OBD (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
GAT096A
AT-291
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/EURO-OBD
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/EURO-OBD

NJAT0330
HAT097
AT-292
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/EURO-OBD (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT130
AT-293
O/D OFF or A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
O/D OFF or A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does

Not Come On =NJAT0331
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp does not come on for
about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”.
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
SAT467J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I Harness for short or open between battery, ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19
and 28
I Refer to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-124.
I Ignition switch and fuse Refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
AT-294
O/D OFF or A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On (Cont’d)
2 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT468J
Continuity should exist. FE
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Refer
to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-124. MT
3 CHECK LAMP CIRCUIT

2. Check continuity between TCM terminals 13 and 10.
Continuity should exist. AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT469JB
RS
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check the following items: HA
I O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp.
I Harness and fuse for short or open between ignition switch and O/D OFF or A/T check SC
indicator lamp
I Harness for short or open between O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp and TCM. EL
IDX
AT-295
O/D OFF or A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On (Cont’d)
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.
AT-296
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N”

Position
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0332
GI
I Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N”
position. MA
I Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”, “2”, “1”
or “R” position.
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
EM
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to PNP switch circuit? LC
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
EC
FE
CL
MT
SCIA0706E
Yes or No
Yes © Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate”, AT-336.
AX
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH INSPECTION SU

Check for short or open of PNP switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2.
Refer to “TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate”, AT-336. BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT408JA HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. SC
NG © Repair or replace PNP switch.
EL
IDX
AT-297
Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position (Cont’d)
3 CHECK CONTROL CABLE

Check control cable. Refer to AT-355.
SAT023JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-355.
4 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Check starting system. Refer to SC-13, “STARTING SYSTEM”.
OK or NG
AT-298
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed
In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or

Backward When Pushed
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0333
GI
Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with
selector lever in “P” position. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT023JB
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS

Check parking components. Refer to “Parking Pawl Components”, AT-364, 365.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT282F
OK or NG
RS
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts. BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-299
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves =NJAT0334

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” posi-
tion.
SAT023JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level again.
SAT638A
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Refill ATF.
AT-300
In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves (Cont’d)
3 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan. GI
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
MA
EM
LC
SAT171B
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
FE
NG © 1. Disassemble A/T.
2. Check the following items: CL
I Forward clutch assembly
I Overrun clutch assembly
I Reverse clutch assembly MT
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
AX
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- SU
nector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-301
Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position
Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position =NJAT0335

SYMPTOM:
There is large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor
circuit?
SAT831HA
Yes or No
Yes © Check damaged circuit. Refer to the following items.
General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East
I LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE: AT-177
I THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR: AT-135
I BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER
SOURCE: AT-166
Euro-OBD
I LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE: AT-240
I THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR: AT-259
SOURCE: AT-274
No © GO TO 2.

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “Line Pressure Test”, AT-87.
SAT494G
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot
valve and pilot filter)
I Oil pump assembly
AT-302
Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position (Cont’d)
3 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-303
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R”

Position =NJAT0336
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting “R” position.
SAT638A
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Refill ATF.

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position. Refer to “Line Pressure Test”, AT-87.
SAT494G
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-354.
valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve (AT-177: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-240: Euro-OBD)
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following item:
I Oil pump assembly
AT-304
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)
3 CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions. GI
Refer to “STALL TEST”, AT-83.
MA
EM
LC
SAT493G
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
FE
OK in “1” position, NG in © 1. Disassemble A/T.
“R” position 2. Check the following items: CL
I Reverse clutch assembly
I Low & reverse brake assembly
NG in both “1” and “R” © GO TO 6. MT
positions

1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition. AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT171B RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. BT
NG © GO TO 6.
HA
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. SC
OK or NG
EL
nector. IDX
AT-305
Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)

1. Disassemble A/T.
I High clutch assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
AT-306
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or

“1” Position
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0337
GI
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D”, “2” or “1”
position. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT638A
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
MT
NG © Refill ATF.

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “Line Pressure Test ”, AT-87.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT494G
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354. BT
valve and pilot filter) HA
I Line pressure solenoid valve (AT-177: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-240: Euro-OBD)
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Oil pump assembly
SC
EL
IDX
AT-307
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)
3 CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “Stall Test”, AT-83.
SAT493G
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 6.

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 6.
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.
AT-308
Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354. GI
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve (AT-177: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-240: Euro-OBD) MA
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Forward one-way clutch
EM
I Low one-way clutch
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-309
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 =NJAT0338

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise test — Part 1.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Is Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position OK?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-304.

Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B overrun clutch
solenoid valve, torque converter clutch solenoid valve, or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
SAT695K
Yes or No
Except for Euro-OBD
I VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR): AT-127
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A: AT-143
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B: AT-149
I OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE: AT-155
I TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE: AT-160
I VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR: AT-132
Euro-OBD
I OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE: AT-268
No © GO TO 3.
AT-310
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 (Cont’d)
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to AT-135, “THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Except for Euro-OBD/Refer to GI
AT-259, “DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Euro-OBD
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT004K
OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
CL
Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “Line Pressure Test”, AT-87. MT
AX
SU
SAT494G BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
NG © GO TO 8.
RS
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition. BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT171B IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 8.
AT-311
Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 (Cont’d)

I Shift valve A
I Shift valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.

I Shift valve A
I Shift valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Torque converter
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
AT-312
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not

Kickdown: D4 → D2
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0339
GI
A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed.
A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator MA
pedal fully at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Are Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position and Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 OK?
EM
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
LC
No © Go to Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position and Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1, AT-307, 310. EC
2 CHECK CONTROL CABLE FE

CL
MT
AX
SAT023JB
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
BR
3 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) AND CHECK VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT ST
Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-127 (Except for
Euro-OBD), AT-196 (EURO-OBD) and AT-132 (Except for Euro-OBD), AT-281 (EURO-OBD).
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed
BT
sensor·MTR circuits.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-313
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 (Cont’d)

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to AT-135, “HROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Except for Euro-OBD/Refer to
SAT004K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
5 CHECK A/T FLUID CONIDITION

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 8.

1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-354.
I Shift valve A
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve A (AT-143: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-247: Euro-OBD)
I Shift solenoid valve B (AT-149: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-253: Euro-OBD)
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
AT-314
A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 (Cont’d)
7 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM LC

1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-354.
I Shift valve A EC
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve A (AT-143: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-247: Euro-OBD)
I Shift solenoid valve B (AT-149: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-253: Euro-OBD) FE
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T. CL
I Servo piston assembly
I Brake band MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-315
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 =NJAT0340

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position and Vehicle Cannot Be
Started From D1, AT-307, 310.

SAT023JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT
Euro-OBD), AT-196 (Euro-OBD) and AT-132 (Except for Euro-OBD), AT-281 (Euro-OBD).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT-316
A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 (Cont’d)

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to AT-135, “THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Except for Euro-OBD/Refer to GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT004K
OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 5.
CL
1. Remove oil pan. MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT171B
OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 8.
RS
BT
I Shift valve B
HA
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
EL
IDX
AT-317
7 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.

I Shift valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Brake band
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
AT-318
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 =NJAT0341

SYMPTOM:
I A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed. GI
I A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM MA
Yes or No EM
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position and Vehicle Cannot Be LC
Started From D1, AT-307, 310.
EC
With CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits? FE
I PNP switch
I Overdrive control switch
I A/T fluid temperature sensor CL
I Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
I Shift solenoid valve A or B
I Vehicle speed sensor·MTR MT
AX
SU
SAT833HA BR
Yes or No
Yes © Check damaged circuit. Refer to the following items. ST
Except for Euro-OBD
I VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR): AT-127
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A: AT-143 RS
SOURCE): AT-166 BT
I TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate: AT-336
Euro-OBD HA
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B: AT-253 SC
SOURCE): AT-274
I VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR: AT-281 EL
I TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate: AT-336
No © GO TO 3.
IDX
AT-319

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to AT-135, “THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Except for Euro-OBD/Refer to
SAT004K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 7.

I Shift valve A
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
AT-320
6 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM

I Shift valve A EC
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter FE
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Servo piston assembly CL
I Brake band
OK or NG
MT
OK © GO TO 6.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-321
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up =NJAT0342

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), vehicle speed sensor·MTR, torque
converter clutch solenoid valve, A/T fluid temperature sensor or engine speed signal after cruise test?
SAT696K
Yes or No
Except for Euro-OBD
SOURCE: AT-166
I ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL: AT-173
Euro-OBD
SOURCE: AT-274
I ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL: AT-201
No © GO TO 2.

SAT004K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
AT-322
A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up (Cont’d)

1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-354. GI
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Torque converter relief valve MA
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check torque converter.
EM
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
LC
EC
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. FE
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END CL
nector. MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-323
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition =NJAT0343

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds.
1 CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test?
SAT835H
Yes or No
Yes © Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-173 (Except for Euro-OBD)/AT-201 (Euro-
OBD).
No © GO TO 2.

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT-324
A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition (Cont’d)
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM

I Torque converter clutch control valve EC
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T. FE
4. Check torque converter.
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 4.
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-325
Lock-up Is Not Released
Lock-up Is Not Released =NJAT0344

SYMPTOM:
Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.
1 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
SCIA0706E
Yes or No
Yes © Check closed throttle position switch circuit. Refer to “TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not
Activate”, AT-336.
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.
AT-326
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3)
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light

Braking D4 → D3)
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0345
GI
I Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T
shifts from D4 to D3. MA
I Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning
overdrive control switch OFF.
I Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting EM
A/T from “D” to “2” position.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS LC
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT836H
Yes or NO
Yes © Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT-155 (Except for Euro-OBD)/AT-
268 (Euro-OBD).
AX
No © GO TO 2.

SU
AT-259, “DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Euro-OBD BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT004K HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. SC
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor. (AT-135: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-259: Euro-
OBD)
EL
IDX
AT-327
Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3) (Cont’d)

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 6.

I Overrun clutch reducing valve
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve (AT-155: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-268: Euro-OBD)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.

I Overrun clutch reducing valve
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve (AT-155: Except for Euro-OBD/AT-268: Euro-OBD)
3. Disassemble A/T.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
AT-328
Vehicle Does Not Start From D1
Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 NJAT0346

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise test — Part 2. GI
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle MA
speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT934FA
Yes or No CL
Except for Euro-OBD
I VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR): AT-127 MT
Euro-OBD
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A: AT-247 AX
No © GO TO 2.
SU
2 CHECK SYMPTOM BR
Check again.
OK or NG ST
OK © Go to Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1, AT-310.
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. RS
nector.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-329
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”
A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3, When Overdrive

Control Switch “ON” → “OFF” =NJAT0347
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 when changing overdrive
control switch to “OFF” position.
1 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
SCIA0706E
Yes or No
Yes © Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-330.
No © Go to A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3, AT-316.
AT-330
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22, When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position
A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22, When Selector

Lever “D” → “2” Position
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0348
GI
A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 when changing selector lever
from “D” to “2” position. MA
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to PNP switch circuit?
EM
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? LC
EC
FE
CL
SCIA0706E MT
Yes or No
Yes © Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-336.
No © Go to A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2, AT-313.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-331
A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position
A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector

Lever “2” → “1” Position =NJAT0349
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever
from “2” to “1” position.
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
SCIA0706E
Yes or No
No © GO TO 2.

SAT023JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT-332
A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position (Cont’d)

MA
EM
LC
SAT171B
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
FE
NG © GO TO 5.
CL
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354. MT
I Shift valve A
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items: AX
I Brake band
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts. BR
6 CHECK SYMPTOM ST
Check again.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT778B
OK or NG EL
nector.
AT-333
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake =NJAT0350

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting
from 22 (12) to 11.
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
SCIA0706E
Yes or No
No © GO TO 2.

SAT023JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT-334
Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake (Cont’d)

MA
EM
LC
SAT171B
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
FE
NG © GO TO 5.
CL
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354. MT
I Shift valve A
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items: AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts. BR
6 CHECK SYMPTOM ST
Check again.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT778B
OK or NG EL
nector.
AT-335
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate NJAT0351
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF or A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on in
TCM self-diagnostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is
good.
DESCRIPTION NJAT0351S01
I PNP switch
The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range
switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector
SAT088JA
lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
I Overdrive control and A/T check switch
Detects the switch position (ON or OFF) and sends a signal to
the TCM.
signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed.
SAT360HA
SAT274KB
SAT004K
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NJAT0351S02
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2.
No (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 3.
II)
AT-336
TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (Cont’d)
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II GI
3. Read out “P/N”, “R”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position.
Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT701J
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 4. (With overdrive control switch)
OK © GO TO 6. (Without overdrive control switch) MT
I PNP switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Diode (P, N positions) (Except for Euro-OBD)
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-337
3 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each posi-
tion.
Voltage:
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
MTBL0138
SAT470J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. (With overdrive control switch)
OK © GO TO 7. (Without overdrive control switch)
I PNP switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Diode (P, N positions) (Except for Euro-OBD)
AT-338
4 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II GI
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SWITCH”.
Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.
(Overdrive control switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means overdrive “OFF”.)
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT645J
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
MT
I Overdrive control switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch
I Harness of ground circuit for overdrive control switch for short or open
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-339
5 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 22 and ground when overdrive control switch is “ON” and “OFF”.
Voltage:
Switch position “ON”:
Battery voltage
Switch position “OFF”:
1V or less
SAT048K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
I Overdrive control switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch
I Harness of ground circuit for overdrive control switch for short or open
AT-340
6 CHECK A/T CHECK SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II GI
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SWITCH”.
Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.
(Overdrive control switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means A/T check “ON”.)
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT645J
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
MT
I A/T check switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Harness for short or open between TCM and A/T check switch
I Harness of ground circuit for A/T check switch for short or open
AX
7 CHECK A/T CHECK SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. SU
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 22 and ground when A/T check switch is “ON” and “OFF”.
Voltage: BR
Switch position “ON”:
Battery voltage
Switch position “OFF”: ST
1V or less
RS
BT
HA
SAT531JE
OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 9.
EL
I A/T check switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Harness for short or open between TCM and A/T check switch
I Harness of ground circuit for A/T check switch for short or open IDX
AT-341
8 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Refer to steps from 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-66. — Euro-
OBD
MTBL0011
SAT702J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
I Throttle position switch — Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.
AT-342
9 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)

1. Refer to steps from 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-66. — Euro-
OBD
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. MA
3. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.
EM
LC
MTBL0577 EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT454JA
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 10.
RS
I Throttle position switch — Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344. BT
HA
10 CHECK DTC
Perform “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-336. SC
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END EL
NG © I Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
I If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector. IDX
AT-343
COMPONENT INSPECTION NJAT0351S03
Overdrive Control Switch NJAT0351S0301
I Check continuity between two terminals 7 and 8.
Switch position Continuity
ON No
OFF Yes
SAT005K
A/T Check Switch NJAT0351S0304

I Check continuity between two terminals 1 and 2.
Switch position Continuity
ON No
OFF Yes
SAT229JD
PNP Switch NJAT0351S0302

1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 3 and between ter-
minals 2 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through
each position.
Lever position Terminal No.
P 3—7 1—2
R 3—8
N 3—9 1—2
D 3—6
2 3—5
1 3—4
SAT402JA
2. If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected

from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
3. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-355.
4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check con-
tinuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-355.
6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
SAT089JA
AT-344
Throttle Position Switch NJAT0351S0303
Closed throttle position switch (idle position)
I Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5. GI
Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-66. — Euro-OBD
MA
Released Yes
EM
Depressed No
SAT851JA I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-66, “Basic LC

Inspection”. — Except for Euro-OBD/Refer to EC-586, “Basic
Inspection”. — Euro-OBD
EC
FE
CL
MT
Wide open throttle position switch
Released No AX
Depressed Yes
SU
BR
SAT852JA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-345
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
I The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
I The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock
solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location NJAT0103
SAT006K
AT-346
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — NJAT0104
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT088
AT-347

SYMPTOM 1:
I Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key
in ON position and brake pedal applied.
I Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in
ON position and brake pedal released.
I Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key
is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to
“P” position. It can be removed when selector lever is set to
any position except “P”.
1 CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Check key interlock cable for damage.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-352.
2 CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION

Check selector lever position for damage.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check selector lever. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE — PNP Switch and Control
Cable Adjustment”, AT-355.
3 CHECK POWER SOURCE

2. Check voltage between A/T device harness connector M51 terminal 4 (G) and ground.
SAT656K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 4.
AT-348

Check the following items: GI
1. Harness for short or open between ignition switch and A/T device harness terminal 4
2. Fuse
3. Ignition switch (Refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.) MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
EM
LC
5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A/T DEVICE
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
I Check voltage between A/T device harness connector M51 terminal 2 (R/G) and ground. EC
Voltage:
Brake pedal depressed:
Battery voltage FE
Brake pedal released:
0V
CL
MT
AX
SAT657K
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © GO TO 6. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-349

Check the following items:
1. Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch harness connector 1
2. Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness connector 2 and A/T device harness connector 2
3. Fuse
4. Stop lamp switch
a. Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector M27 terminals 1 and 2.
SAT661K
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-11, “BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness terminal 3 and ground.
SAT009K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
AT-350
8 CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH AND RELAY CIRCUIT (COIL SIDE)

I Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M51 terminals 2 and 3. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT654K EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9. FE
NG © Replace park position switch or relay.
CL
9 CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND RELAY CIRCUIT (POINT SIDE)
1. Connect A/T device harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. MT
3. Check operation sound.
AX
MTBL1313
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Replace shift lock solenoid or relay. BR
10 CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION

ST
1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
3. Recheck shift lock operation. RS
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END BT
NG © GO TO 11.
HA
11 CHECK A/T DEVICE INSPECTION
1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test.
2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection. SC
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END EL
IDX
AT-351
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components
Components NJAT0107
SAT996J
CAUTION:
I Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be
damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adja-
cent parts.
I After installing key interlock cable to control device, make
sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in
their positions.
Removal NJAT0108
1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster
holder and remove interlock rod from cable.
SAT853J
AT-352
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Removal (Cont’d)
2. Remove lock plate from steering lock assembly and remove
key interlock cable.
GI
MA
EM
SAT854J LC
Installation NJAT0109
1. Turn ignition key to lock position. EC
2. Set A/T selector lever to P position.
3. Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install
lock plate. FE
4. Clamp cable to steering column and fix to control cable with
band.
CL
SAT854J
MT
5. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.
AX
SU
BR
SAT804E
6. Install casing cap to bracket.

7. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT805E
SC
EL
IDX
AT-353
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators NJAT0110

REMOVAL NJAT0110S01
1. Drain ATF from transaxle.
2. Remove oil pan and gasket.
SAT992C
3. Disconnect A/T solenoid valve harness connector.
SAT064K
4. Remove stopper ring from A/T solenoid harness terminal body.

5. Remove A/T solenoid harness by pushing terminal body into
transmission case.
AAT265A
6. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts.

Bolt length, number and location:
Bolt symbol A B C
Bolt length “” 40.0 mm 33.0 mm 43.5 mm

(1.575 in) (1.299 in) (1.713 in)
Number of bolts 5 6 2
I Be careful not to drop manual valve and servo release

accumulator return springs.
7. Disassemble and inspect control valve assembly if necessary.
Refer to AT-369.
AAT260A
AT-354
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators (Cont’d)
8. Remove servo release and N-D accumulators by applying
compressed air if necessary.
I Hold each piston with a rag. GI
MA
EM
SAT935J LC
INSTALLATION NJAT0110S02
I Tighten fixing bolts to specification. EC
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
I Set manual shaft in Neutral position, then align manual
plate with groove in manual valve. FE
I After installing control valve assembly to transmission
case, make sure that selector lever can be moved to all
positions. CL
SAT497H
MT
Control Cable Adjustment NJAT0111
Move selector lever from the “P” position to the “1” position. You
should be able to feel the detents in each position. If the detents
cannot be felt or if the pointer indicating the position is improperly
aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. AX
1. Place selector lever in “P” position.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut and place manual shaft in “P” SU
position.
3. Pull control cable, by specified force, in the direction of the
arrow shown in the illustration. BR
Specified force: 6.9 N (0.7 kg, 1.5 lb)
4. Return control cable in the opposite direction of the arrow for
1.0 mm (0.039 in). ST
5. Tighten control cable lock nut.
6. Move selector lever from “P” to “1” position again. Make sure RS
that selector lever moves smoothly.
7. Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control
cable. Install any part removed. BT
HA
AAT980
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment SC NJAT0112

1. Remove control cable end from manual shaft.
2. Set manual shaft in “N” position.
EL
3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts.
IDX
SAT479J
AT-355
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment (Cont’d)
4. Use a 4 mm (0.157 in) pin for this adjustment.
a. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
b. Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight
into hole in PNP switch.
5. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts.
6. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch.
8. Adjust control cable. Refer to “Control Cable Adjustment”,
AT-355.
9. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-336.
SAT480J
Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement NJAT0113

1. Remove drive shaft assemblies. Refer to AX-10, “Drive Shaft”.
2. Remove oil seals.
SAT905DB
3. Install oil seals.

I Apply ATF to oil seal surface before installing.
XAT002
I Install oil seals so that dimensions “A” and “B” are within
specifications.
Unit: mm (in)
A B
5.5 - 6.5 (0.217 - 0.256) −0.5 to 0.5 (−0.020 to 0.020)
SAT027K
Revolution Sensor Replacement NJAT0114

1. Disconnect revolution sensor harness connector.
2. Remove harness bracket from A/T.
3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Always use new sealing parts.
SAT303G
AT-356
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
Removal NJAT0115
CAUTION:
Before separating transaxle from engine, remove the crank- GI
shaft position sensor (Euro-OBD) from transaxle. Be careful
not to damage sensor.
1. Remove battery and bracket.
MA
2. Remove air duct between throttle body and air cleaner.
3. Disconnect A/T solenoid valve harness connector, PNP switch EM
harness connector and revolution sensor harness connector.
4. Remove crankshaft position sensor (Euro-OBD) from tran-
saxle. LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT065K
MT
5. Drain ATF from transaxle.
6. Disconnect control cable from transaxle.
7. Disconnect oil cooler hoses.
8. Remove drive shafts. Refer to AX-10, “Drive Shaft”.
9. Remove the intake manifold support bracket. Refer to EM-12,
AX
“OUTER COMPONENT PARTS”.
10. Remove starter motor from transaxle. SU
Tighten bolts to specified torque.
: 41 - 52 N·m (4.2 - 5.3 kg-m, 30 - 38 ft-lb)
11. Remove upper bolts fixing transaxle to engine. BR
SAT304G
12. Support transaxle with a jack.
ST
RS
BT
HA
13. Remove center member. SC

I Tighten center member fixing bolts to specified torque, Refer
to EM-57, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
EL
IDX
SAT028K
AT-357
Removal (Cont’d)
14. Remove rear plate cover.
15. Remove torque converter bolts.
Rotate crankshaft to gain access to securing bolts.
16. Remove rear transaxle to engine bracket. Refer to EM-57,
“REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
17. Support engine with a jack.
18. Remove rear transaxle mount. Refer to EM-57, “REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION”.
19. Remove lower bolts fixing transaxle to engine.
20. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack.
AAT259A
Installation NJAT0116
1. Check drive plate runout.
CAUTION:
Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear
teeth.
Maximum allowable runout:
Refer to EM-70, “FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT”.
I If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate with ring
gear.
SAT977H
2. When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure dis-

tance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”:
15.9 mm (0.626 in) or more
SAT573D
3. Install torque converter to drive plate.

I With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to
check that transaxle rotates freely without binding.
AAT266A
4. Tighten belts fixing transaxle.

Tightening torque Bolt length “ ”
Bolt No.
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) mm (in)
1 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 23 - 29) 50 (1.97)
2*1 16 - 20 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) 25 (0.98)
3 31 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 23 - 29) 30 (1.18)
4*2 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 23 - 29) 16 (0.63)
5*2 16 - 20 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) 20 (0.79)

SAT029K
AT-358
Installation (Cont’d)
*1: With gusset to A/T
*2: With gusset to cylinder block
GI
MA
EM
SAT058K LC
6. Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-355.
EC
7. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-336.
8. Refill transaxle with ATF and check fluid level.
9. Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that tran- FE
saxle operates correctly. With parking brake applied, idle
engine. Move selector lever through “N” to “D”, to “2”, to “1” and
“R” positions. A slight shock should be felt through the hand CL
gripping the selector each time the transaxle is shifted.
10. Perform road test. Refer to AT-88.
SAT638A
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-359
OVERHAUL
Components-1 Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Components-1 Except 3AX10 and 3AX18

models NJAT0119
AAT419A
AT-360
OVERHAUL
Components-1 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Components-1 3AX10 and 3AX18 models NJAT0232
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT030K
AT-361
OVERHAUL

models NJAT0233
SAT102K
AT-362
OVERHAUL
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT936J
AT-363
OVERHAUL

models NJAT0235
SAT061K
AT-364
OVERHAUL
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT103K
AT-365
OVERHAUL
Oil Channel
Oil Channel NJAT0118
SAT032K
AT-366
OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings — Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle

Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings —
Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models GI
NJAT0117
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AAT416A
AT-367
OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings — 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle

Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings —
3AX10 and 3AX18 models NJAT0237
SAT067K
AT-368
NJAT0120
DISASSEMBLY
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
GI
MA
EM
SAT049K LC
2. Remove torque converter.
EC
FE
CL
SAT008D
MT
3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as
shown at left.
a. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
b. While fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one-way AX
clutch spline using flat-bladed screwdriver.
c. Check inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace torque
converter assembly. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT009D
4. Remove oil charging pipe and oil cooler tube. SC
EL
IDX
SAT586H
AT-369
DISASSEMBLY
5. Set manual shaft to “P” position.

6. Remove PNP switch.
SAT023JB
7. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

I Do not reuse oil pan bolts.
8. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of
malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure.
I If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after
repair of A/T. Refer to LC-17, “Radiator”.
SAT128E 9. Remove control valve assembly according to the following pro-
cedures.
a. Remove control valve assembly mounting bolts A, B and C.
AAT260A
AT-370
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove stopper ring from terminal body.

c. Push terminal body into transmission case and draw out sole-
noid harness. GI
MA
EM
AAT262A LC
10. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly as a pre-
caution.
EC
FE
CL
SAT017D
MT
11. Remove return spring from servo release accumulator piston.
AX
SU
BR
SAT877J
12. Remove servo release accumulator piston with compressed

air. ST
13. Remove O-rings from servo release accumulator piston.
RS
BT
HA
SAT019DA
14. Remove N-D accumulator piston and return spring with com- SC
pressed air.
15. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston.
EL
IDX
SAT020D
AT-371
DISASSEMBLY
16. Check accumulator pistons and contact surface of transmis-

sion case for damage.
17. Check accumulator return springs for damage and free length.
Return springs:
Refer to SDS, AT-490.
SAT023DA
18. Remove lip seals from band servo oil port.
SAT129E
19. Remove converter housing according to the following proce-

dures.
a. Remove converter housing mounting bolts A and B.
SAT027D
b. Remove converter housing.
SAT028D
c. Remove O-ring from differential oil port.
SAT131E
AT-372
DISASSEMBLY
20. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
SAT030D LC
21. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transmission
case.
EC
FE
CL
NAT033
MT
22. Remove differential side bearing adjusting shim from transmis-
sion case.
AX
SU
BR
SAT132E
23. Remove differential side bearing outer race from converter

housing. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT840DB
24. Remove oil seal from converter housing using a screwdriver. SC

I Be careful not to damage case.
EL
IDX
SAT133E
AT-373
DISASSEMBLY
25. Remove side oil seal from transmission case using a screw-
driver.
SAT072D
26. Remove oil tube from converter housing.
SAT134EA
27. Remove oil pump according to the following procedures.

a. Remove O-ring from input shaft.
SAT127E
b. Remove oil pump assembly from transmission case.
SAT035D
c. Remove thrust washer and bearing race from oil pump assem-
bly.
SAT036D
AT-374
DISASSEMBLY
28. Remove brake band according to the following procedures.

a. Loosen lock nut, then back off anchor end pin.
I Do not reuse anchor end pin. GI
MA
EM
SAT037DA LC
b. Remove brake band from transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
SAT038D
MT
I To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not
stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in
the figure at left.
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band. AX
SU
BR
SAT039D
c. Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT040D
29. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) and reverse clutch SC
according to the following procedures.
a. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) with reverse clutch.
EL
IDX
SAT041D
AT-375
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) from reverse

clutch.
SAT042D
c. Remove needle bearing from high clutch drum.

d. Check input shaft assembly and needle bearing for damage or
wear.
SAT043D
30. Remove high clutch hub and needle bearing from transmission
case.
31. Check high clutch hub and needle bearing for damage or wear.
SAT044D
32. Remove front sun gear and needle bearings from transmission
case.
33. Check front sun gear and needle bearings for damage or wear.
SAT579D
34. Remove front planetary carrier assembly and low one-way

clutch according to the following procedures.
a. Remove snap ring using a screwdriver.
SAT046D
AT-376
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove front planetary carrier with low one-way clutch.
GI
MA
EM
SAT047D LC
c. Check that low one-way clutch rotates in the direction of the
arrow and locks in the opposite direction.
d. Remove low one-way clutch from front planetary carrier by
EC
rotating it in the direction of unlock.
FE
CL
SAT048D
MT
e. Remove needle bearing from front planetary carrier.
AX
SU
BR
SAT049D
f. Check front planetary carrier, low one-way clutch and needle

bearing for damage or wear. ST
g. Check clearance between pinion washer and planetary carrier
using feeler gauge.
RS
Standard clearance:
0.15 - 0.70 mm (0.0059 - 0.0276 in)
Allowable limit: BT
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
Replace front planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allow- HA
able limit.
SAT050D
35. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear SC
according to the following procedures.
a. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly from transmission
case. EL
IDX
SAT051D
AT-377
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove rear sun gear from rear planetary carrier.
SAT052D
c. Remove needle bearings from rear planetary carrier assembly.
SAT053D
d. Check rear planetary carrier, rear sun gear and needle bear-
ings for damage or wear.
e. Check clearance between pinion washer and rear planetary
carrier using feeler gauge.
Standard clearance:
0.15 - 0.70 mm (0.0059 - 0.0276 in)
Allowable limit:
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
Replace rear planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allow-
able limit.
SAT054D
36. Remove rear internal gear from transmission case.
SAT055D
37. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.

I Check needle bearing for damage or wear.
SAT056D
AT-378
DISASSEMBLY
38. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
SAT272E LC
39. Remove thrust washer from transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
AAT215A
MT
Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
40. Remove side cover.
I Do not reuse side cover bolts.
AX
SU
BR
SAT702D
41. Remove output shaft, output gear and reduction gear accord-
ing to the following procedures. ST
a. Set manual lever to “P” position to fix idler gear and output
gear.
RS
b. Unlock both idler gear and output gear lock nuts using a pin
punch.
BT
HA
SAT703D
c. Remove idler gear and output gear lock nuts. SC

I Do not reuse idler gear and output gear lock nuts.
EL
IDX
SAT704D
AT-379
DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove idler gear and output gear using a puller.
SAT705D
e. Remove reduction pinion gear and output shaft from transmis-

sion case.
f. Remove reduction pinion bearing adjusting shim from reduc-
tion pinion gear.
g. Remove adjusting spacer from output shaft.
SAT706DB
3AX10 and 3AX18 models

42. Remove output shaft assembly according to the following pro-
cedures.
a. Remove side cover bolts.
SAT059D
b. Remove side cover by lightly tapping it with a soft hammer.

I Be careful not to drop output shaft assembly. It might
come out when removing side cover.
SAT434D
c. Remove adjusting shim.
SAT440D
AT-380
DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove output shaft assembly.
GI
MA
EM
SAT439D LC
I If output shaft assembly came off with side cover, tap cover
with a soft hammer to separate.
EC
FE
CL
SAT435D
MT
e. Remove needle bearing.
AX
SU
BR
SAT453D
43. Disassemble reduction pinion gear according to the following

procedures. ST
a. Set manual shaft to position “P” to fix idler gear.
b. Unlock idler gear lock nut using a pin punch. RS
BT
HA
SAT060D
c. Remove idler gear lock nut. SC

I Do not reuse idler gear lock nut.
EL
IDX
SAT061D
AT-381
DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove idler gear with puller.
SAT841DA
e. Remove reduction pinion gear.

f. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim from
reduction pinion gear.
SAT062K
44. Remove return spring from parking shaft using a screwdriver.
SAT064D
45. Draw out parking shaft and remove parking pole from trans-
mission case.
46. Check parking pole and shaft for damage or wear.
SAT065D
47. Remove parking actuator support from transmission case.

I Check parking actuator support for damage or wear.
SAT066D
AT-382
DISASSEMBLY
48. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
SAT311G LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-383
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Manual Shaft
Manual Shaft
COMPONENTS NJAT0121
SAT481J
REMOVAL NJAT0122
1. Remove detent spring from transmission case.
SAT313G
2. Drive out manual plate retaining pin.
SAT076D
3. Drive and pull out parking rod plate retaining pin.

4. Remove parking rod plate from manual shaft.
5. Draw out parking rod from transmission case.
SAT077D
AT-384
Manual Shaft (Cont’d)
6. Pull out manual shaft retaining pin.
7. Remove manual shaft and manual plate from transmission
case. GI
MA
EM
SAT049F LC
8. Remove manual shaft oil seal.
EC
FE
CL
SAT080D
MT
INSPECTION NJAT0123
I Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if nec-
essary.
AX
SU
BR
INSTALLATION
1. Install manual shaft oil seal.
NJAT0124 ST
I Apply ATF to outer surface of oil seal.
RS
BT
HA
SAT081D
2. Install manual shaft and manual plate. SC
EL
IDX
SAT610H
AT-385
Manual Shaft (Cont’d)
3. Align groove of manual shaft and hole of transmission case.
4. Install manual shaft retaining pin.
SAT074E
5. Install parking rod to parking rod plate.

6. Set parking rod assembly onto manual shaft.
SAT078D
7. Drive in manual plate retaining pin and parking rod plate retain-
ing pin.
SAT087D
8. Install detent spring.
SAT313G
AT-386
Oil Pump
Oil Pump
COMPONENTS NJAT0125
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT931J
MT
DISASSEMBLY NJAT0126
1. Remove seal rings.
AX
SU
BR
SAT699H
2. Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT091D
3. Remove inner and outer gear from oil pump housing. SC
EL
IDX
SAT092D
AT-387
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
SAT093D
5. Remove oil pump housing oil seal.
SAT094D
INSPECTION NJAT0127
Oil Pump Housing, Oil Pump Cover, Inner Gear and
Outer Gear NJAT0127S01
I Check for wear or damage.
Side Clearances NJAT0127S02

I Measure side clearance of inner and outer gears in at least
four places around each outside edge. Maximum measured
values should be within specified range.
Standard clearance:
0.02 - 0.04 mm (0.0008 - 0.0016 in)
I If clearance is less than standard, select inner and outer gear
as a set so that clearance is within specifications.
Inner and outer gear:
I If clearance is more than standard, replace whole oil pump
assembly except oil pump cover.
SAT095D
AT-388
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
I Measure clearance between outer gear and oil pump housing.
Standard clearance:
0.08 - 0.15 mm (0.0031 - 0.0059 in) GI
Allowable limit:
0.15 mm (0.0059 in) MA
I If not within allowable limit, replace whole oil pump assembly
except oil pump cover.
EM
SAT096D LC
Side Ring Clearance NJAT0127S03
I Install new seal rings onto oil pump cover. EC
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance:
0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) FE
Allowable limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) CL
I If not within allowable limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.
SAT097D
MT
ASSEMBLY NJAT0128
1. Install oil seal on oil pump housing.
AX
SU
BR
SAT098D
2. Install O-ring on oil pump housing.

I Apply ATF to O-ring.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT093D
3. Install inner and outer gears on oil pump housing. SC

I Take care with the direction of the inner gear.
EL
IDX
SAT092D
AT-389
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4. Install oil pump cover on oil pump housing.
a. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assem-
bly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly on oil
pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
b. Tighten bolts in numerical order.
SAT101D
5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring groove with
petroleum jelly.
I Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while install-
ing. It may deform the ring.
SAT699H
AT-390
Control Valve Assembly
Control Valve Assembly

COMPONENTS =NJAT0129
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
SAT033K BR
1. Solenoid valve assembly 9. Separating plate 17. Steel ball

2. O-ring 10. Lower separating gasket 18. Control valve upper body ST
3. Clip 11. Steel ball 19. Check ball
4. Terminal body 12. Control valve inter body 20. Oil cooler relief valve spring
5. Control valve lower body 13. Pilot filter 21. O-ring
RS
6. Oil strainer 14. Upper inter separating gasket 22. T/C pressure holding spring
7. Support plate 15. Separating plate 23. Check ball
8. Lower inter separating gasket 16. Upper separating gasket
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-391
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY =NJAT0130
I Disassemble upper, inter and lower bodies.
Bolt symbol A B C D E F G
Bolt length “” 13.5 mm 58.0 mm 40.0 mm 66.0 mm 33.0 mm 78.0 mm 18.0 mm
(0.531 in) (2.283 in) (1.575 in) (2.598 in) (1.299 in) (3.071 in) (0.709 in)
Number of bolts 6 3 6 11 2 2 1
F: Reamer bolt with nut
SAT869J
1. Remove bolts A, D and F, and remove oil strainer from control

valve assembly.
SAT083F
2. Remove solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid

valve from control valve assembly.
I Be careful not to lose the line pressure solenoid valve
spring.
SAT316GA
AT-392
3. Remove O-rings from solenoid valves and terminal body.
GI
MA
EM
SAT317G LC
4. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts B, C and F.
EC
FE
CL
SAT064F
MT
5. Remove lower body from inter body.
AX
SU
BR
SAT432D
6. Turn over lower body, and accumulator support plates.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT109D
7. Remove bolts E, separating plate and separating gaskets from SC

lower body.
8. Remove check balls, oil cooler relief valve springs and T/C
pressure holding spring from lower body. EL
I Be careful not to lose steel balls and relief valve springs.
IDX
SAT873J
AT-393
9. Remove inter body from upper body.
10. Remove pilot filter, separating plate and gaskets from upper
body.
SAT065F
11. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in inter
body and then remove them.
I Be careful not to lose steel balls.
SAT870J
12. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper
body and then remove them.
I Be careful not to lose steel balls.
SAT871J
INSPECTION NJAT0131
Lower and Upper Bodies NJAT0131S01
I Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in
lower body.
SAT872J
I Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in

upper body.
SAT321G
AT-394
Oil Strainer NJAT0131S02
I Check wire netting of oil strainer for damage.
GI
MA
EM
SAT115D LC
Shift Solenoid Valves A and B, Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve, Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve and
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
EC
NJAT0131S03
I Refer to “Resistance Check” of each solenoid valve.
Except for Euro-
FE
Valves Euro-OBD
OBD
Shift solenoid valve A AT-148 AT-252 CL

Shift solenoid vavle B AT-154 AT-258
SAT322GC Line pressure solenoid valve AT-183 AT-246 MT

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-165 AT-239
Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-159 AT-273
AX
SU
BR
Oil Cooler Relief Valve Spring

I Check springs for damage or deformation.
NJAT0131S04 ST
I Measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard: RS
Unit: mm (in)
Part No. D
BT
31872 31X00 17.0 (0.669) 8.0 (0.315)
HA
SAT138D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0132
SC
1. Install upper, inter and lower body.
a. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their
proper positions. EL
IDX
SAT871J
AT-395
b. Install upper separating gasket, upper inter separating gasket
and upper separating plate in order shown in illustration.
I Always use new gaskets.
SAT072F
c. Install reamer bolts F from bottom of upper body. Using reamer

bolts as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a seat.
SAT073F
d. Install pilot filter.
SAT074F
e. Place inter body as shown in the illustration. Install steel balls

in their proper positions.
SAT870J
f. Install inter body on upper body using reamer bolts F as

guides.
I Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls.
SAT076F
AT-396
g. Install check balls, oil cooler relief valve springs and T/C pres-
sure holding spring in their proper positions in lower body.
GI
MA
EM
SAT873J LC
h. Install lower separating gasket, inner separating gasket and
lower separating plate in order shown in the illustration.
EC
FE
CL
SAT077F
MT
i. Install bolts E from bottom of lower body. Using bolt E as
guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set.
j. Install support plates on lower body.
AX
SU
BR
SAT078F
k. Install lower body on inter body using reamer bolts F as guides

and tighten reamer bolts F slightly. ST
RS
BT
HA
AAT536
2. Install O-rings to solenoid valves and terminal body. SC

I Apply ATF to O-rings.
EL
IDX
SAT317G
AT-397
3. Install and tighten bolts.
Bolt symbol A B C D E F G
Bolt length “” 13.5 mm 58.0 mm 44.0 mm 66.0 mm 33.0 mm 78.0 mm 18.0 mm
(0.531 in) (2.283 in) (1.732 in) (2.598 in) (1.299 in) (3.071 in) (0.709 in)
Number of bolts 6 3 6 11 2 2 1
F: Reamer bolt with nut
SAT869J
a. Install and tighten bolts B to specified torque.

: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
SAT081F
b. Install solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid

valve to lower body.
SAT316GA
AT-398
c. Remove reamer bolts F and set oil strainer on control valve
assembly.
d. Reinstall reamer bolts F from lower body side. GI
MA
EM
SAT323G LC
e. Tighten bolts A, C, D and F to specified torque.
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
EC
FE
CL
SAT083F
MT
f. Tighten bolts E to specified torque.
: 3.4 - 4.4 N·m (0.35 - 0.45 kg-m, 30.4 - 39.1 in-lb)
AX
SU
BR
SAT084FA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-399
Control Valve Upper Body
Control Valve Upper Body

Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS table on page AT-479.
SAT012K
1. Control valve upper body 11. Plug 24. Pilot valve

2. Overrun clutch reducing valve 12. Sleeve 25. Retainer plate
spring 13. Retainer plate 26. Plug
3. Overrun clutch reducing valve 14. 1-2 accumulator valve 27. 1-2 accumulator piston
4. Plug 15. 1-2 accumulator valve spring 28. 1-2 accumulator piston spring
5. Retainer plate 16. Plug 29. 1-2 accumulator retainer plate
6. Torque converter relief valve 17. Retainer plate 30. Retainer plate
7. Torque converter relief valve 18. Cooler check valve 31. Plug
spring 19. Cooler check valve spring 32. 1st reducing valve
8. Retainer plate 20. Plug 33. 1st reducing valve spring
9. Torque converter clutch control 21. Retainer plate 34. Retainer plate
valve
22. Retainer plate 35. 3-2 timing valve spring
10. Torque converter clutch control
valve spring 23. Pilot valve spring 36. 3-2 timing valve
AT-400
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
1. Remove valves at retainer plates.
I Do not use a magnetic “hand”. GI
MA
EM
SAT321G LC
a. Use a screwdriver to remove retainer plates.
EC
FE
CL
SAT135D
MT
b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring, plugs or sleeves.
I Remove plugs slowly to prevent internal parts from jump-
ing out.
AX
SU
BR
SAT136D
c. Place mating surface of valve body face down, and remove

internal parts. ST
I If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down
and lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
RS
I Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.
BT
HA
SAT137D
INSPECTION NJAT0135
SC
Valve Spring NJAT0135S01
I Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.
Also check for damage or deformation. EL
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-479. IDX
I Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
Control Valves NJAT0135S02
I Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs.
SAT138D
AT-401
ASSEMBLY NJAT0136
I Lay control valve body down when installing valves. Do
not stand the control valve body upright.
SAT139D
1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install
control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
I Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.
SAT140DA
I Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the
valves into their proper positions.
SAT141D
1-2 Accumulator Valve NJAT0136S01

I Install 1-2 accumulator valve. Align 1-2 accumulator retainer
plate from opposite side of control valve body.
I Install return spring, 1-2 accumulator piston and plug.
SAT142DA
1. Install retainer plates.

I Install retainer plate while pushing plug or return spring.
SAT143D
AT-402
Retainer Plate (for control valve upper body) NJAT0136S02
Refer to AT-400.
Unit: mm (in) GI
Name of valve and piston No. Length A Length B
Pilot valve 22 21.5 (0.846) MA

1-2 accumulator valve 17
40.5 (1.59)
1-2 accumulator piston 25 EM
1st reducing valve 30 21.5 (0.846)
SAT086F
Overrun clutch reducing valve 5 6.0 (0.236) 24.0 (0.945)
LC
Torque converter relief valve 8 21.5 (0.846)
Torque converter clutch control valve 13 28.0 (1.102)

EC
3-2 timing valve 34 21.5 (0.846)
FE
Cooler check valve 21 24.0 (0.945)
I Install proper retainer plates. CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-403
Control Valve Lower Body
Control Valve Lower Body

Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS table on page AT-479.
SAT013K
1. Control valve lower body 13. Manual valve 25. Plug

2. Shift valve B spring 14. Retainer plate 26. Accumulator control valve
3. Shift valve B 15. Sleeve 27. Accumulator control valve spring
4. Plug 16. Plug 28. Retainer plate
5. Retainer plate 17. Spring seat 29. Shift valve A spring
6. Pressure modifier valve 18. Pressure regulator valve spring 30. Shift valve A
7. Pressure modifier valve spring 19. Pressure regulator valve 31. Retainer plate
8. Parallel pin 20. Retainer plate 32. Plug
9. Sleeve 21. Plug 33. Plug
10. Piston 22. Overrun clutch control valve 34. Shuttle valve spring
11. Pressure modifier piston spring 23. Overrun clutch control valve spring 35. Shuttle control valve
12. Retainer plate 24. Retainer plate
AT-404
Control Valve Lower Body (Cont’d)
Remove valves at retainer plate.
For removal procedures, refer to AT-392. GI
MA
EM
SAT872J LC
INSPECTION NJAT0139
Valve Springs NJAT0139S01 EC
I Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also
measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard: FE
I Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
CL
Control Valves NJAT0139S02
I Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for
SAT138D damage. MT
ASSEMBLY NJAT0140
I Install control valves.
For installation procedures, refer to AT-402.
AX
SU
BR
SAT872J
Retainer Plate (for control valve lower body)

Refer to AT-404.
NJAT0140S01 ST
Unit: mm (in)
Name of control valve No. Length A Length B Type RS

Pressure regulator valve 14
Accumulator control valve 24 BT

Shift valve A 28 6.0 28.0
I
Overrun clutch control valve 20 (0.236) (1.102) HA
SAT089F
Pressure modifier valve 12
Shuttle control valve 31

SC
Shift valve B 5 — — II
EL
I Install proper retainer plates.
IDX
AT-405
Reverse Clutch
Reverse Clutch
SAT485JB
1. Check operation of reverse clutch.
a. Install seal ring onto drum support of oil pump cover and install
reverse clutch assembly. Apply compressed air to oil hole.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
I D-ring might be damaged.
I Oil seal might be damaged.
I Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
SAT155D
2. Remove snap ring.

3. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish
plates.
SAT156D
4. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from reverse
clutch drum while compressing return springs.
I Set Tool directly above springs.
I Do not expand snap ring excessively.
5. Remove spring retainer and return springs.
SAT157D
AT-406
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
I Do not remove return springs from spring retainer.
GI
MA
EM
SAT301E LC
6. Remove piston from reverse clutch drum by turning it.
EC
FE
CL
SAT159D
MT
7. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston.
AX
SU
BR
SAT138E
INSPECTION NJAT0143 ST
Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return
Springs NJAT0143S01
I Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. RS
I Replace if necessary.
I When replacing spring retainer and return springs,
replace them as a set. BT
HA
Reverse Clutch Drive Plates NJAT0143S02

SC
I Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
I Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
EL
Standard value: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Wear limit: 1.8 mm (0.071 in) IDX
I If not within wear limit, replace.
SAT162D
AT-407
Reverse Clutch Dish Plates NJAT0143S03
I Check for deformation or damage.
I Measure thickness of dish plate.
Thickness of dish plate “t”: 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
I If deformed or fatigued, replace.
SAT163D
Reverse Clutch Piston NJAT0143S04

I Make sure check balls are not fixed.
I Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return
spring. Make sure that there is no air leakage.
I Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make
sure air leaks past ball.
SAT164D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0144
1. Install D-ring and oil seal on piston.
I Take care with the direction of the oil seal.
I Apply ATF to both parts.
SAT160DA
2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly.

I Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.
SAT159D
3. Install return springs and spring retainer on piston.

For return spring, refer to AT-482.
SAT168D
AT-408
4. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while com-
pressing return springs.
I Set Tool directly above return springs. GI
MA
EM
SAT157D LC
5. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plates.
I Do not align the projections of any two dish plates.
EC
I Take care with the order and direction of plates.
FE
CL
SAT170D
MT
6. Install snap ring.
AX
SU
BR
SAT156D
7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If

not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. ST
Specified clearance:
Standard: 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in) RS
Allowable limit: 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Retaining plate: Refer to SDS, AT-479.
BT
HA
SAT174D
8. Check operation of reverse clutch. SC

Refer to “Reverse Clutch”, AT-406.
EL
IDX
SAT173D
AT-409
High Clutch
High Clutch
SAT675K
1. Check operation of high clutch.
a. Apply compressed air to oil hole of input shaft.
I Stop up a hole on opposite side of input shaft.
SAT176D
2. Remove seal rings from input shaft.
SAT177D
AT-410
High Clutch (Cont’d)
4. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate.
GI
MA
EM
SAT178D LC
5. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from high
I Set Tool directly above springs.
EC
6. Remove spring retainer and return springs. FE
CL
SAT617H
MT
I Do not remove return spring from spring retainer.
AX
SU
BR
SAT302E
7. Remove piston from high clutch drum by turning it.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT189D
8. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SC
EL
IDX
SAT139E
AT-411
INSPECTION NJAT0147
Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return
Springs NJAT0147S01
I Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
replace them as a set.
High Clutch Drive Plates NJAT0147S02

Standard value: Refer to SDS, AT-480.
Wear limit: Refer to SDS, AT-480.
SAT162D
High Clutch Piston NJAT0147S03

spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
I Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make
SAT186D
Seal Ring Clearance NJAT0147S04

I Install new seal rings onto input shaft.
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance:
0.08 - 0.23 mm (0.0031 - 0.0091 in)
Allowable limit:
0.23 mm (0.0091 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace input shaft assembly.
SAT187D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0148
SAT182DA
AT-412
2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.
GI
MA
EM
SAT189D LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT191D
MT
I Set Tool directly above return springs.
AX
SU
BR
SAT617H
I Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT193D
5. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. SC

Take care with the order and direction of plates.
EL
IDX
SAT195D
AT-413
not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Standard: 1.4 - 1.8 mm (0.055 - 0.071 in)
Retaining plate:
SAT199D
8. Check operation of high clutch.

Refer to “High Clutch”, AT-410.
SAT196D
9. Install seal rings to input shaft.

I Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
SAT197D
I Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from

spreading.
SAT198D
AT-414
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch

COMPONENTS NJAT0149
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
SAT932JA BR
DISASSEMBLY
1. Check operation of forward clutch and overrun clutch.
NJAT0150 ST
a. Install bearing retainer on forward clutch drum.
b. Apply compressed air to oil hole of forward clutch drum. RS
c. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
BT
HA
SAT201D
d. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: SC

I Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. EL
IDX
SAT202D
AT-415
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch (Cont’d)
2. Remove snap ring for forward clutch.
3. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plate for forward clutch.
SAT203D
4. Remove snap ring for overrun clutch.

5. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plate for overrun clutch.
SAT204D
6. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from forward
SAT205D
8. Remove forward clutch piston with overrun clutch piston from

forward clutch drum by turning it.
SAT216D
9. Remove overrun clutch piston from forward clutch piston by

turning it.
SAT215D
AT-416
10. Remove D-rings and oil seals from forward clutch piston and
overrun clutch piston.
GI
MA
EM
SAT140E LC
INSPECTION NJAT0151
Snap Rings and Spring Retainer NJAT0151S01 EC
FE
CL
MT
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Return Springs
NJAT0151S02
Inspection standard:
AX
I Replace if deformed or fatigued.
SU
BR
SAT138D
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Drive Plates

NJAT0151S03 ST
Thickness of drive plate: RS
Forward clutch
Wear limit: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
BT
Overrun clutch
Standard value: 1.6 mm (0.063 in) HA
SAT162D Wear limit: 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
SC
EL
IDX
AT-417
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Dish Plates NJAT0151S04
I Measure thickness of dish plate.
Thickness of dish plate “t”:
Forward clutch: 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
Overrun clutch: 2.15 mm (0.0846 in)
I If deformed or fatigued, replace.
SAT163D
Forward Clutch Drum NJAT0151S05

I Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole from outside of
forward clutch drum. Make sure air leaks past ball.
I Apply compressed air to oil hole from inside of forward clutch
drum. Make sure there is no air leakage.
SAT213D
Overrun Clutch Piston NJAT0151S06

spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
I Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side. Make
SAT212D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0152
1. Install D-rings and oil seals on forward clutch piston and over-
run clutch piston.
I Take care with direction of oil seal.
SAT208DA
2. Install overrun clutch piston assembly on forward clutch piston

while turning it slowly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston.
SAT215D
AT-418
3. Install forward clutch piston assembly on forward clutch drum
while turning it slowly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. GI
MA
EM
SAT216D LC
4. Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward
clutch drum.
EC
FE
CL
SAT217D
MT
5. Install return spring on piston.
6. Install spring retainer on return springs.
AX
SU
BR
SAT218D
pressing return springs. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT205D
I Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. SC
EL
IDX
SAT220D
AT-419
8. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate
for overrun clutch.
9. Install snap ring for overrun clutch.
SAT204D
10. Measure clearance between overrun clutch retaining plate and

snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Standard: 1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in)
Overrun clutch retaining plate:
SAT227D
11. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate
for forward clutch.
Take care with the order and direction of plates.
12. Install snap ring for forward clutch.
SAT203D
13. Measure clearance between forward clutch retaining plate and

snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Standard: 0.45 - 0.85 mm (0.0177 - 0.0335 in)
Forward clutch retaining plate:
SAT228D
14. Check operation of forward clutch.

Refer to “Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch”, AT-415.
SAT201D
AT-420
15. Check operation of overrun clutch.
Refer to “Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch”, AT-415.
GI
MA
EM
SAT202D LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-421
Low & Reverse Brake
Low & Reverse Brake

SAT039KC
1. Check operation of low & reverse brake.
a. Apply compressed air to oil hole of transmission case.
SAT230D
2. Stand transmission case.

4. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate from trans-
mission case.
SAT231D
AT-422
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
5. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring while com-
I Set Tool directly above return springs. GI
MA
EM
SAT242D LC
I Do not remove return springs from spring retainer.
EC
FE
CL
SAT303E
MT
7. Apply compressed air to oil hole of transmission case while
holding piston.
8. Remove piston from transmission case by turning it.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT234D
9. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SC
EL
IDX
SAT767G
AT-423
INSPECTION NJAT0155
Low & Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and
Return Springs NJAT0155S01
replace them as a set.
Low & Reverse Brake Drive Plates NJAT0155S02

Wear limit: 1.8 mm (0.071 in)
SAT162D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0156
SAT235DA
2. Stand transmission case.

3. Install piston assembly on transmission case while turning it
slowly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.
SAT239D

SAT241D
AT-424
5. Install snap ring while compressing return springs.
GI
MA
EM
SAT242D LC
6. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plates and dished
plates.
I Do not align the projections on the two dished plates.
EC
I Make sure to put the plates in the correct order and direc-
tion. FE
CL
SAT254E
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT231D

not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate (front ST
side).
RS
Standard: 1.4 - 1.8 mm (0.055 - 0.071 in)
Allowable limit:
2.8 mm (0.110 in) BT
Retaining plate:
HA
SAT246D
9. Check operation of low & reverse brake. SC

Refer to “DISASSEMBLY”, AT-422.
EL
IDX
SAT230D
AT-425
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and

Overrun Clutch Hub
COMPONENTS NJAT0157
SAT875J
1. Remove snap ring from overrun clutch hub.
2. Remove overrun clutch hub from forward clutch hub.
SAT249D
3. Remove thrust washer from forward clutch hub.
SAT250D
AT-426
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
4. Remove forward clutch hub from rear internal gear.
GI
MA
EM
SAT251D LC
5. Remove end bearing from rear internal gear.
EC
FE
CL
SAT252D
MT
6. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.
AX
SU
BR
SAT253D
7. Remove end bearing from forward one-way clutch.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT254D
8. Remove one-way clutch from forward clutch hub. SC
EL
IDX
SAT255D
AT-427
INSPECTION NJAT0159
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun
Clutch Hub NJAT0159S01
I Check rubbing surfaces for wear or damage.
SAT256D
Snap Ring, End Bearings and Forward One-way Clutch

NJAT0159S02
I Check snap ring and end bearings for deformation and dam-
age.
I Check forward one-way clutch for wear and damage.
SAT257D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0160
1. Install forward one-way clutch on forward clutch.
I Take care with the direction of forward one-way clutch.
SAT976H
2. Install end bearing on forward one-way clutch.

I Apply petroleum jelly to end bearing.
SAT259D
3. Install thrust washer on rear internal gear.

I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
I Align pawls of thrust washer with holes of rear internal
gear.
SAT260D
AT-428
4. Install end bearing on rear internal gear.
I Apply petroleum jelly to end bearing.
GI
MA
EM
SAT261D LC
5. Install forward clutch hub on rear internal gear.
I Check operation of forward one-way clutch.
Hold rear internal gear and turn forward clutch hub. Check
EC
forward clutch hub for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
FE
I If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction
of forward one-way clutch.
CL
SAT713H
MT
6. Install thrust washer and overrun clutch hub.
I Align pawls of thrust washer with holes of overrun clutch
hub.
AX
SU
BR
SAT263D
7. Install overrun clutch hub on rear internal gear.

I Align projections of rear internal gear with holes of over-
ST
run clutch hub.
RS
BT
HA
SAT264D
8. Install snap ring to groove of rear internal gear. SC
EL
IDX
SAT248D
AT-429
O/Shaft, O/Gear, I/Gear, R/Pinion Gear and B/Retainer — Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
O/Shaft, O/Gear, I/Gear, R/Pinion Gear and B/

Retainer — Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
COMPONENTS NJAT0239
SAT104K
1. Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer.
SAT666D
AT-430
O/Shaft, O/Gear, I/Gear, R/Pinion Gear and B/Retainer — Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models (Cont’d)
2. Press out output shaft bearing inner race.
GI
MA
EM
SAT592G LC
3. Remove output shaft bearing outer race from bearing retainer.
EC
FE
CL
SAT168K
MT
4. Remove output gear bearing inner race.
AX
SU
BR
SAT669D
5. Remove output gear bearing outer race from bearing retainer.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT169K
6. Remove idler gear bearing inner race. SC
EL
IDX
SAT648D
AT-431
7. Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transmission case.
NAT047
8. Press out reduction pinion gear bearing from reduction pinion

gear.
NAT048
9. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from trans-

mission case.
SAT651D
INSPECTION NJAT0241
Output Shaft, Output Gear, Idler Gear and Reduction
Pinion Gear NJAT0241S01
I Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending.
I Check gears for wear, chips and cracks.
Bearings NJAT0241S02
I Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks,
pitting or wear.
I When replacing taper roller bearing, replace inner and
SPD715 outer race as a set.
I Install new seal rings to output shaft.
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of out-
put shaft.
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Wear limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace output shaft.
SAT671D
I Install new seal rings to bearing retainer.
AT-432
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bear-
ing retainer.
Standard clearance: GI
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Wear limit:
MA
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace bearing retainer.
EM
LC
ASSEMBLY NJAT0242
1. Press reduction pinion gear bearing on reduction pinion gear. EC
FE
CL
NAT049
MT
2. Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transmis-
sion case.
AX
SU
BR
SAT654D
3. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT655D
4. Install idler gear bearing outer race on transmission case. SC
EL
IDX
NAT051
AT-433
5. Press output gear bearing inner race on output gear.
SAT655D
6. Install output gear bearing outer race on bearing retainer.
SAT934DA
7. Press output shaft bearing inner race on output shaft.
SAT592G
8. Install output shaft bearing outer race on bearing retainer.
SAT937DA
9. Install new seal rings onto output shaft and bearing retainer.
I Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
SAT676D
AT-434
10. Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from
spreading.
GI
MA
EM
SAT677D LC
Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear
and Bearing Retainer — 3AX10 and 3AX18 EC
models
COMPONENTS NJAT0161 FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT105K SC
EL
IDX
AT-435
Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and Bearing Retainer — 3AX10 and 3AX18 models (Cont’d)
1. Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer.
SAT644D
2. Remove output shaft bearing with screwdrivers.

I Always replace bearing with a new one when removed.
I Do not damage output shaft.
SAT645D
3. Remove snap ring from bearing retainer.
SAT646D
4. Remove needle bearing from bearing retainer.
NAT046
5. Remove idler gear bearing inner race from idler gear.
SAT648D
AT-436
6. Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
NAT047 LC
7. Press out reduction pinion gear bearing from reduction pinion
gear.
EC
FE
CL
NAT048
MT
8. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from trans-
mission case.
AX
SU
BR
SAT651D
INSPECTION NJAT0163 ST
Output Shaft, Idler Gear and Reduction Pinion Gear
NJAT0163S01
I Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending.
I Check gears for wear, chips and cracks. RS
BT
HA
Bearing NJAT0163S02
SC
I Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks,
pitting or wear.
I When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and EL
inner race as a set.
IDX
SPD715
AT-437
I Install new seal rings to output shaft.
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of out-
put shaft.
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within allowable limit, replace output shaft.
SAT652D
I Install new seal rings to bearing retainer.
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bear-
ing retainer.
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within allowable limit, replace bearing retainer.
ASSEMBLY NJAT0164
1. Press reduction pinion gear bearing on reduction pinion gear.
NAT049
2. Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transmis-

sion case.
SAT654D
3. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear.
SAT655D
AT-438
4. Install idler gear bearing outer race on transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
NAT051 LC
5. Press output shaft bearing on output shaft.
EC
FE
CL
NAT052
MT
6. Press needle bearing on bearing retainer.
AX
SU
BR
SAT658D
7. Install snap ring to bearing retainer.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT659D
8. After packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly, carefully install SC

new seal rings on output shaft and bearing retainer.
EL
IDX
SAT660D
AT-439
I Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from
spreading.
SAT661D
Band Servo Piston Assembly

COMPONENTS NJAT0165
SAT098K
1. Remove band servo piston snap ring.
SAT288D
2. Apply compressed air to oil hole in transmission case to

remove OD servo piston retainer and band servo piston
assembly.
I Hold band servo piston assembly with a rag or nylon
waste.
SAT289D
AT-440
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
3. Apply compressed air to oil hole in OD servo piston retainer to
remove OD servo piston from retainer.
I Hold OD servo piston while applying compressed air. GI
MA
EM
SAT290DB LC
4. Remove D-ring from OD servo piston.
EC
FE
CL
SAT593GB
MT
5. Remove O-rings from OD servo piston retainer.
AX
SU
BR
SAT292DA
6. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston

retainer by pushing it forward. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT293D
7. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing SC

servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring.
EL
IDX
SAT294D
AT-441
8. Remove OD servo return spring, band servo thrust washer and
band servo piston stem from band servo piston.
SAT295DA
9. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.
SAT296DA
10. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
SAT594GA
INSPECTION NJAT0167
Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem NJAT0167S01
I Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.
SAT298DA
Return Springs NJAT0167S02

Band servo inspection standard:
SAT138D
AT-442
ASSEMBLY NJAT0168
1. Install D-rings to servo piston retainer.
I Apply ATF to O-rings. GI
I Pay attention to position of each O-ring.
MA
EM
SAT595GA LC
2. Install band servo piston stem, band servo thrust washer, OD
servo return spring and spring retainer to band servo piston.
EC
FE
CL
SAT295DA
MT
3. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing
servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring.
AX
SU
BR
SAT301D
4. Install O-rings to servo piston retainer.

ST
I Pay attention to the positions of the O-rings.
RS
BT
HA
SAT296DA
5. Install band servo piston assembly to servo piston retainer by SC

pushing it inward.
EL
IDX
SAT303D
AT-443
6. Install D-ring to OD servo piston.
I Apply ATF to D-ring.
SAT596GB
7. Install O-rings to OD servo piston retainer.

I Pay attention to the positions of the O-rings.
SAT292DA
8. Install OD servo piston to OD servo piston retainer.
SAT306DA
9. Install band servo piston assembly and 2nd servo return spring
to transmission case.
I Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmis-
sion case.
SAT307DA
10. Install OD servo piston assembly to transmission case.

I Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmis-
sion case.
AAT692
AT-444
11. Install band servo piston snap ring to transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
SAT288D LC
Final Drive
COMPONENTS-1 EXCEPT 3AX10 AND 3AX18 MODELS
NJAT0354
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
SAT680DA BR
COMPONENTS-2 3AX10 AND 3AX18 MODELS NJAT0169
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT040K
AT-445
Final Drive (Cont’d)
1. Remove final gear.
SAT311D
2. Press out differential side bearings.
SAT099K
3. Remove speedometer drive gear.
SAT313D
4. Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin.
SAT970H
5. Draw out pinion mate shaft from differential case.

6. Remove pinion mate gears and side gears.
SAT316D
AT-446
INSPECTION NJAT0171
Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case
I
NJAT0171S01
Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears, pinion GI
and mate gears.
I Check washers for wear. MA
EM
SAT041K LC
Bearings NJAT0171S03
I Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, EC
pitting or wear.
I When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and
inner race as a set. FE
CL
SPD715
MT
ASSEMBLY NJAT0172
1. Install side gear and thrust washers in differential case.
2. Install pinion mate gears and thrust washers in differential case
while rotating them.
I When inserting, be careful not to damage pinion mate gear
AX
washers.
I Apply ATF to any parts. SU
BR
SAT318D
3. Measure clearance between side gear and differential case

with washers using the following procedure. ST
a. Set Tool and dial indicator on side gear.
b. Move side gear up and down to measure dial indicator deflec- RS
tion. Always measure indicator deflection on both side gears.
Clearance between side gear and differential case with
washers: BT
0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
HA
NAT056
c. If not within specification adjust clearance by changing thick- SC

ness of side gear thrust washers.
Side gear thrust washer:
Refer to SDS, AT-483. EL
IDX
SMT616
AT-447
4. Install lock pin.
I Make sure that lock pin is flush with case.
SAT970H
5. Install speedometer drive gear on differential case.

I Align the projection of speedometer drive gear with the
groove of differential case.
SAT313D
6. Install final gear and tighten fixing bolts in numerical order.
SAT326D
7. Press on differential side bearings.
SMT700B
AT-448
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
Assembly (1) NJAT0173

1. Install revolution sensor onto transmission case.
Always use new sealing parts.
GI
MA
EM
SAT311G LC
2. Install differential side oil seals on transmission case and con-
verter housing, so that “A” and “B” are within specifications.
EC
FE
CL
SAT881I
MT
Unit: mm (in)
A B
5.5 - 6.5 (0.217 - 0.256) −0.5 to 0.5 (−0.020 to 0.020)

AX
SU
BR
SAT027K
3. Install parking actuator support to transmission case.

I Pay attention to direction of parking actuator support.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT328D
4. Install parking pawl on transmission case and fix it with park- SC

ing shaft.
EL
IDX
SAT329D
AT-449
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
5. Install return spring.
SAT330D
Adjustment (1) NJAT0174

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD NJAT0174S01
1. Install differential side bearing outer race without adjusting
shim on transmission case.
2. Install differential side bearing outer race on converter housing.
NAT059
3. Place final drive assembly on transmission case.

4. Install transmission case on converter housing. Tighten trans-
mission case fixing bolts A and B to the specified torque.
SAT027D
5. Attach dial indicator on differential case at transmission case

side.
6. Insert Tool into differential side gear from converter housing.
7. Move Tool up and down and measure dial indicator deflection.
Differential side bearing preload “T”:
0.04 - 0.09 mm (0.0016 - 0.0035 in)
8. Select proper thickness of differential side bearing adjusting
shim(s) using SDS table as a guide.
Differential side bearing adjusting shim:
NAT060
AT-450
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment (1) (Cont’d)
9. Remove converter housing from transmission case.
10. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case.
11. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transmission GI
case.
12. Reinstall differential side bearing outer race and shim(s)
selected from SDS table on transmission case. MA
13. Reinstall converter housing on transmission case and tighten
transmission case fixing bolts to the specified torque. EM
NAT033 LC
14. Insert Tool into differential case and measure turning torque of
final drive assembly.
I Turn final drive assembly in both directions several times
EC
to seat bearing rollers correctly.
Turning torque of final drive assembly (New bearing): FE
0.49 - 1.08 N·m (5.0 - 11.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 9.5 in-lb)
I When old bearing is used again, turning torque will be
slightly less than the above. CL
I Make sure torque is close to the specified range.
NAT062
MT
REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING PRELOAD NJAT0174S02
I Be sure to remove final drive assembly before doing this pro-
cedure.
I Using caliper and straightedge, calculate a dimention “T”
(adjuster shim thickness) in the left figure by the following for- AX
mula. And adjust the inspection standard for pre-load (rotating
slide torque) as shown below.
T=A–E
SU
Inspection standard for preload:
0.1 - 0.69 N·m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb) BR
SAT876J
1. Remove transmission case and final drive assembly from con-

verter housing. ST
2. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing
adjusting shim using the following procedures.
RS
a. Place reduction pinion gear on transmission case as shown.
BT
HA
SAT332DA
b. Place idler gear bearing on transmission case. SC

c. Measure dimensions “B”, “C” and “D” and calculate dimension
“A”.
A = D − (B + C) EL
“A”: Distance between the surface of idler gear bear-
ing inner race and the adjusting shim mating surface
of reduction pinion gear. IDX
SAT333DA
AT-451
ASSEMBLY
I Measure dimension “B” between the end of reduction pinion
gear and the surface of transmission case.
I Measure dimension “B” in at least two places.
SAT334DA
I Measure dimension “C” between the surface of idler gear bear-

ing inner race and the surface of transmission case.
I Measure dimension “C” in at least two places.
SAT335D
I Measure dimension “D” between the end of reduction pinion

gear and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pin-
ion gear.
I Measure dimension “D” in at least two places.
I Calculate dimension “A”.
A = D − (B + C)
SAT336DA
d. Measure dimension “E” between the end of idler gear and the
idler gear bearing inner race mating surface of idler gear.
I Measure dimension “E” in at least two places.
SAT337D
e. Calculate “T” and select proper thickness of reduction pinion

gear bearing adjusting shim using SDS table as a guide.
T = A − E – 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)*
Reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim:
*: Bearing preload
AT-452
ASSEMBLY
3. Install reduction pinion gear and reduction pinion gear bearing
adjusting shim selected in step 2-e on transmission case.
4. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear. GI
5. Press idler gear on reduction pinion gear.
I Press idler gear so that idler gear can be locked by park-
ing pawl. MA
EM
SAT338DA LC
6. Tighten idler gear lock nut to the specified torque.
I Lock idler gear with parking pawl when tightening lock
nut.
EC
FE
CL
SAT339D
MT
7. Measure turning torque of reduction pinion gear.
I When measuring turning torque, turn reduction pinion
gear in both directions several times to seat bearing roll-
ers correctly.
Turning torque of reduction pinion gear: AX
0.1 - 0.69 N·m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb)
SU
BR
SAT340DC
OUTPUT SHAFT BEARING PRELOAD — EXCEPT

3AX10 AND 3AX18 MODELS ST
NJAT0174S04
1. Select proper thickness of output shaft bearing adjusting
spacer using the following procedures. RS
a. Remove paper rolled around output shaft.
b. Place bearing retainer on output shaft.
BT
HA
SAT682D
c. Place output gear bearing inner race on bearing retainer. SC

d. Measure dimensions “G” and “H” and calculate dimension “F”.
“F”: Distance between the surface of output gear bearing
inner race and adjusting shim mating surface of output EL
shaft.
F=H–G
IDX
SAT683D
AT-453
ASSEMBLY
I Measure dimension “G” between end of output shaft and sur-
face of output gear bearing inner race.
I Measure dimension “G” in at least two places.
SAT684D
I Measure dimension “H” between end of output shaft and

adjusting spacer mating surface of output shaft.
I Measure dimension “H” in at least two places.
I Calculate dimension “F”.
F=H–G
SAT685D
e. Measure dimension “I” between end of output gear (adjusting

spacer mating surface) and bearing inner race fitting surface.
I Measure dimension “I” in at least two places.
SAT686D
f. Calculate dimension “T2”.

“T2”: Distance between adjusting spacer mating surface
of output gear and output shaft
T2 = F – I
g. Select proper thickness of output shaft bearing adjusting
spacer using SDS table as a guide.
Output shaft bearing adjusting spacer:
2. Install bearing retainer on transmission case.
SAT687D
AT-454
ASSEMBLY
3. Place output shaft on bearing retainer.
4. Place output shaft bearing adjusting spacer selected in step
1-g on output shaft. GI
5. Press output gear bearing inner race on output gear.
6. Press output gear on output shaft.
MA
EM
SAT688D LC
7. Tighten output gear lock nut to specified torque.
EC
FE
CL
SAT689D
MT
8. Remove idler gear to measure output shaft bearing preload.
AX
SU
BR
SAT690D
9. Measure output shaft bearing preload.

I When measuring bearing preload, turn output shaft in
ST
both directions several times to seat bearing rollers cor-
rectly.
RS
Output shaft bearing preload:
0.25 - 0.88 N·m (2.5 - 9.0 kg-cm, 2.2 - 7.8 in-lb)
I If not within specified range, readjust bearing preload. BT
HA
SAT691D
10. Install idler gear and tighten lock nut to specified torque. SC
11. After properly adjusting bearing preload, clinch idler gear and
output gear lock nuts as shown.
EL
IDX
SAT692D
AT-455
ASSEMBLY
12. Install new gasket and side cover on transmission case.
I Always replace side cover bolts when removed.
I Refer to “Overhaul”, AT-364.
SAT224E
OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY — 3AX10 AND 3AX18

MODELS NJAT0174S03
I Measure clearance between side cover and the end of the
output shaft bearing.
I Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that clearance is
within specifications.
SAT341D
1. Install bearing retainer for output shaft.
SAT347D
2. Install output shaft thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer.
SAT438D
3. Install output shaft on transmission case.
SAT439D
AT-456
ASSEMBLY
4. Measure dimensions “1” and “2” at side cover and then cal-
culate dimension “A”.
I Measure dimension “1” and “2” in at least two places GI
“A”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface
and adjusting shim mating surface
A = 1 − 2 MA
2: Height of gauge
EM
SAT874DA LC
5. Measure dimensions “2” and “3” and then calculate dimen-
sion “B”.
Measure “2” and “3” in at least two places. EC
“B”: Distance between the end of output shaft bearing
outer race and the side cover fitting surface of transmis-
sion case FE
B = 2 − 3
2: Height of gauge CL
SAT875DA
MT
6. Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that output shaft
end play (clearance between side cover and output shaft bear-
ing) is within specifications.
Output shaft end play (A − B):
0 - 0.5 mm (0 - 0.020 in) AX
Output shaft end play adjusting shim:
Refer to SDS, AT-489. SU
7. Install adjusting shim on output shaft bearing.
BR
SAT440D
8. Apply locking sealant to transmission case as shown in illus-

tration. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT441D
9. Install side cover on transmission case. SC

I Apply locking sealant to the mating surface of transmis-
sion case.
EL
IDX
SAT442D
AT-457
ASSEMBLY
10. Tighten side cover fixing bolts to specified torque.
I Do not mix bolts A and B.
I Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts.
I Refer to “Overhaul”, AT-365.
SAT124E

1. Remove paper rolled around bearing retainer.
2. Install thrust washer on bearing retainer.
SAT354D
3. Install forward clutch assembly.

I Align teeth of low & reverse brake drive plates before
installing.
I Make sure that bearing retainer seal rings are not spread.
SAT355D
4. Install thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer.

I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing.
I Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing.
SAT356D
5. Install thrust needle bearing on rear internal gear.

I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing.
SAT357D
AT-458
ASSEMBLY
6. Hold forward clutch hub and turn overrun clutch hub.
Check overrun clutch hub for directions of lock and unlock.
I If not as shown in illustration, check installed direction of for- GI
ward one-way clutch.
MA
EM
SAT358D LC
7. Install rear internal gear assembly.
I Align teeth of forward clutch and overrun clutch drive
plate.
EC
FE
CL
SAT359D
MT
8. Install needle bearing on rear planetary carrier.
I Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
I Pay attention to direction of needle bearing.
AX
SU
BR
SAT360D
9. Install rear sun gear on rear planetary carrier.

I Pay attention to direction of rear sun gear.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT052D
10. Install rear planetary carrier on transmission case. SC
EL
IDX
SAT362D
AT-459
ASSEMBLY
11. Install thrust needle bearing on front planetary carrier.
I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing.
SAT363D
12. Install low one-way clutch to front planetary carrier by turning

it in the direction of the arrow as shown.
13. While holding front planetary carrier, turn low one-way clutch.
Check low one-way clutch for correct directions of lock and
unlock.
SAT048D
14. Install front planetary carrier assembly on transmission case.
SAT047D
15. Install snap ring with screwdriver.

I Forward clutch and bearings must be correctly installed
for snap ring to fit groove of transmission case.
SAT046D
16. Install needle bearing on front sun gear.

SAT367D
AT-460
ASSEMBLY
17. Install front sun gear on front planetary carrier.
GI
MA
EM
SAT368D LC
18. Install needle bearing on front sun gear.
EC
FE
CL
SAT369D
MT
19. Install high clutch hub on front sun gear.
AX
SU
BR
SAT370D
20. Install needle bearing on high clutch hub.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT371D
21. Remove paper rolled around input shaft. SC

22. Install input shaft assembly.
I Align teeth of high clutch drive plates before installing.
EL
IDX
SAT372D
AT-461
ASSEMBLY
23. Install reverse clutch assembly.
I Align teeth of reverse clutch drive plates before installing.
SAT373D
Adjustment (2) NJAT0176

When any parts listed below are replaced, adjust total end play and
reverse clutch end play.
Reverse clutch
Part name Total end play
end play
Transmission case I I
Overrun clutch hub I I
Rear internal gear I I
Rear planetary carrier I I
Rear sun gear I I
Front planetary carrier I I
Front sun gear I I
High clutch hub I I
High clutch drum I I
Oil pump cover I I
Reverse clutch drum — I
TOTAL END PLAY NJAT0176S01

I Measure clearance between reverse clutch drum and needle
bearing for oil pump cover.
I Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is
SAT374D
1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension

“J”.
SAT375D
AT-462
ASSEMBLY
a. Measure dimension “K”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT376D LC
b. Measure dimension “L”.
c. Calculate dimension “J”.
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of trans-
EC
mission case and needle bearing mating surface of high
clutch drum
FE
J=K−L
CL
SAT377D
MT
2. Measure dimension “M”.
a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
AX
SU
BR
SAT378D
b. Measure dimension “M”.

“M”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface ST
and needle bearing on oil pump cover
“M1”: Indication of gauge
RS
BT
HA
SAT379D
c. Measure thickness of straightedge “t”. SC

M = M1 − t
EL
IDX
SAT443D
AT-463
ASSEMBLY
3. Adjust total end play “T3”.
T3 = J − M
Total end play “T3”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
I Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
is within specifications.
Bearing races: Refer to SDS, AT-490.
REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY NJAT0176S02

I Measure clearance between oil pump cover and thrust washer
for reverse clutch drum.
I Select proper thickness of thrust washer so that end play is
SAT380D
1. Measure dimensions “O” and “P” and then calculate dimension

“N”.
SAT381D
a. Place thrust washer on reverse clutch drum.

b. Measure dimension “O”.
SAT382D
c. Measure dimension “P”.

d. Calculate dimension “N”.
“N”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of trans-
mission case and thrust washer on reverse clutch drum
N=O−P
SAT383D
AT-464
ASSEMBLY
2. Measure dimensions “R” and “S” and then calculate dimension
“Q”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT384D LC
a. Measure dimension “R”.
EC
FE
CL
SAT385D
MT
b. Measure dimension “S”.
c. Calculate dimension “Q”.
“Q”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface
and thrust washer mating surface
Q=R−S AX
SU
BR
SAT386D
3. Adjust reverse clutch end play “T4”.

T4 = N − Q
ST
Reverse clutch end play:
0.65 - 1.00 mm (0.0256 - 0.0394 in) RS
I Select proper thickness of thrust washer so that reverse clutch
end play is within specifications.
Thrust washer: Refer to SDS, AT-490. BT
HA

SC
1. Remove reverse clutch assembly and install needle bearing on
high clutch assembly.
EL
2. Install reverse clutch assembly.
IDX
SAT387D
AT-465
ASSEMBLY
3. Install anchor end pin and lock nut on transmission case.
4. Place brake band on outside of reverse clutch drum. Tighten
anchor end pin just enough so that brake band is evenly fitted
on reverse clutch drum.
SAT038D
5. Place bearing race selected in total end play adjustment step

on oil pump cover.
I Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
SAT389D
6. Place thrust washer selected in reverse clutch end play step

on reverse clutch drum.
SAT390D
7. Install oil pump assembly on transmission case.
SAT391D
8. Tighten oil pump fixing bolts to specified torque.
SAT392D
AT-466
ASSEMBLY
9. Install O-ring to input shaft.
I Apply ATF to O-ring.
GI
MA
EM
SAT034D LC
10. Adjust brake band.
a. Tighten anchor end pin to specified torque.
EC
Anchor end pin:
: 3.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)
FE
CL
SAT394D
MT
b. Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns.
AX
SU
BR
SAT395D
c. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT396D
11. Apply compressed air to oil holes of transmission case and SC

check operation of brake band.
EL
IDX
SAT397D
AT-467
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (4)

1. Install final drive assembly on transmission case.
SAT030D
2. Install oil tube on converter housing.
SAT033DA
3. Install O-ring on differential oil port of transmission case.

4. Install converter housing on transmission case.
I Apply locking sealant to mating surface of converter
housing.
Bolt Length mm (in)
A 32.8 (1.291)
B 40 (1.57)
SAT405D
5. Install accumulator piston.

a. Check contact surface of accumulator piston for damage.
SAT406DA
AT-468
ASSEMBLY
b. Install O-rings on accumulator piston.
Accumulator piston O-rings: GI
MA
EM
SAT407DA LC
c. Install accumulator pistons and return springs on transmission
case.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.
EC
Return springs:
Refer to SDS, AT-490. FE
CL
SAT878J
MT
6. Install lip seals for band servo oil holes on transmission case.
I Apply petroleum jelly to lip seals.
AX
SU
BR
SAT021D
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT022D
7. Install control valve assembly. SC

a. Insert manual valve into control valve assembly.
I Apply ATF to manual valve.
EL
IDX
SAT017D
AT-469
ASSEMBLY
b. Pass solenoid harness through transmission case and install
terminal body on transmission case by pushing it.
c. Install stopper ring to terminal body.
AAT261A
d. Tighten bolts A, B and C.

: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
Bolt length, number and location
Bolt symbol A B C
Bolt length “” 40.0 mm 33.0 mm 43.5 mm

(1.575 in) (1.299 in) (1.713 in)
Number of bolts 5 6 2
AAT260A
8. Install oil pan.

a. Attach magnet to oil pan.
SAT418D
b. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case.

c. Install oil pan on transmission case.
I Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.
I Tighten the four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent
dislocation of gasket.
d. Tighten drain plug to specified torque.
SAT128E
AT-470
ASSEMBLY
9. Install PNP switch.
a. Set manual shaft in “P” position.
b. Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft. GI
c. Move selector lever to “N” position.
MA
EM
SAT023JB LC
d. Use a 4 mm (0.157 in) pin for this adjustment.
1) Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
EC
2) Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight
into hole in PNP switch.
e. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts. FE
f. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch.
CL
SAT426DB
MT
10. Install oil charging pipe and oil cooler tube to transmission
case.
AX
SU
BR
SAT586H
11. Install torque converter.

a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
ST
I Approximately 1 liter (7/8 Imp qt) of fluid is required for a
new torque converter. RS
I When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained.
BT
HA
SAT428DA
b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con- SC

verter with notches of oil pump.
EL
IDX
SAT429D
AT-471
ASSEMBLY
c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in
proper position.
Distance “A”:
15.9 mm (0.626 in) or more
SAT430D
AT-472
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
General Specifications NJAT0179
Except for Euro-OBD, Middle East and Australia GI

Applied model QG15DE QG16DE QG18DE QG13DE QG16DE QG18DE
With catalyzer Without catalyzer MA

RE4F03B
Automatic transaxle
assembly 3AX01 3AX19 3AX69 3AX10 3AX00
3AX71
3AX19 3AX69 3AX10 EM
3AX77
1st 2.861
LC
2nd 1.562
Transaxle 3rd 1.000

gear ratio
EC
4th 0.697
Reverse 2.310
FE
Final drive 3.827 4.072 4.342 4.072 4.072 4.342 4.072 4.342 4.072
Recommended fluid Genuine Nissan ATF or equivalent*1

CL
Fluid capacity (Imp qt) 7.0 (6-1/8)
Middle East Australia Euro-OBD

MT
Applied model RE4F03B
QG13DE QG16DE QG18DE QG16DE QG18DE QG18DE
Automatic transaxle 3AX72

3AX63 3AX64 3BX07 3AX10 3AX19 3AX69 3AX10 3AX18
assembly 3AX78 AX
1st 2.861
2nd 1.562 SU
Transaxle 3rd 1.000
gear ratio
4th 0.697 BR
Reverse 2.310
Final drive 4.072 4.342 4.072 4.342 4.072 4.072 4.342 4.072 4.072 ST
Recommended fluid Genuine Nissan ATF or equivalent*1
Fluid capacity (Imp qt) 7.0 (6-1/8) RS

*1: Refer to MA-21, “Fluids and Lubricants”.
Shift Schedule BT
NJAT0180
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS NJAT0180S01
1. Except for Euro-OBD, the Middle East and Australia: QG15DE + 3AX01 model (With catalyzer) HA
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11 SC
54 - 62 102 - 110 162 - 170 158 - 166 92 - 100 41 - 49 54 - 62
Full throttle
(34 - 39) (63 - 68) (101 - 106) (98 - 103) (57 - 62) (25 - 30) (34 - 39)
EL
26 - 34 51 - 59 122 - 130 70 - 78 40 - 48 5 - 13 54 - 62
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (32 - 37) (76 - 81) (43 - 48) (25 - 30) (3 - 8) (34 - 39)
IDX
AT-473
Shift Schedule (Cont’d)
Except for Euro-OBD, the Middle East and Australia: QG16DE + 3AX19 model (With catalyzer)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
50 - 58 96 - 104 152 - 160 148 - 156 86 - 94 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (60 - 65) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
28 - 36 55 - 63 119 - 127 76 - 84 36 - 44 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (34 - 39) (74 - 79) (47 - 52) (22 - 27) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
45 - 53 87 - 95 139 - 147 135 - 143 77 - 85 38 - 46 45 - 53

Full throttle
(28 - 33) (54 - 59) (86 - 91) (84 - 89) (48 - 53) (24 - 29) (28 - 33)
26 - 34 51 - 59 109 - 117 69 - 77 33 - 41 5 - 13 45 - 53
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (32 - 37) (68 - 73) (43 - 48) (21 - 25) (3 - 8) (28 - 33)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
49 - 57 93 - 101 148 - 156 144 - 152 83 - 91 41 - 49 49 - 57

Full throttle
(30 - 35) (58 - 63) (92 - 97) (89 - 94) (52 - 57) (25 - 30) (30 - 35)
26 - 34 50 - 58 112 - 120 63 - 71 32 - 40 5 - 13 49 - 57
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (70 - 75) (39 - 44) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (30 - 35)
2. Except for Euro-OBD, the Middle East and Australia: QG13DE + 3AX00 model (Without catalyzer)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
50 - 58 95 - 103 152 - 160 148 - 156 85 - 93 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (59 - 64) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
25 - 33 50 - 58 103 - 111 54 - 62 32 - 40 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (64 - 69) (34 - 39) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
Except for Euro-OBD, the Middle East and Australia: QG13DE + 3AX71, 3AX77 model (Without
catalyzer)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
45 - 53 85 - 93 136 - 144 132 - 140 75 - 83 38 - 46 45 - 53

Full throttle
(28 - 33) (53 - 58) (85 - 89) (82 - 87) (47 - 52) (24 - 29) (28 - 33)
22 - 30 45 - 53 92 - 100 48 - 56 29 - 37 5 - 13 45 - 53
Half throttle
(14 - 19) (28 - 33) (57 - 62) (29 - 35) (18 - 23) (3 - 8) (28 - 33)
AT-474
Except for Euro-OBD, the Middle East and Australia: QG16DE + 3AX19 model (Without catalyzer)
Throttle position GI
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
50 - 58 96 - 104 152 - 160 148 - 156 86 - 94 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (60 - 65) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36) MA
28 - 36 55 - 63 119 - 127 76 - 84 36 - 44 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (34 - 39) (74 - 79) (47 - 52) (22 - 27) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
EM
LC
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
EC
45 - 53 87 - 95 139 - 147 135 - 143 77 - 85 38 - 46 45 - 53
Full throttle
(28 - 33) (54 - 59) (86 - 91) (84 - 89) (48 - 53) (24 - 29) (28 - 33)
26 - 34 51 - 59 109 - 117 69 - 77 33 - 41 5 - 13 45 - 53
FE
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (32 - 37) (68 - 73) (43 - 48) (21 - 25) (3 - 8) (28 - 33)
CL
Throttle position
MT
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
49 - 57 93 - 101 148 - 156 144 - 152 83 - 91 41 - 49 49 - 57

Full throttle
(30 - 35) (58 - 63) (92 - 97) (89 - 94) (52 - 57) (25 - 30) (30 - 35)
26 - 34 50 - 58 112 - 120 63 - 71 32 - 40 5 - 13 49 - 57
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (70 - 75) (39 - 44) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (30 - 35) AX
3. For the Middle East: QG13DE + 3AX63 model SU

Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11 BR
50 - 58 95 - 103 152 - 160 148 - 156 85 - 93 41 - 49 50 - 58
Full throttle
(31 - 36) (59 - 64) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
ST
25 - 33 50 - 58 103 - 111 54 - 62 32 - 40 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (64 - 69) (34 - 39) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
RS
For the Middle East: QG13DE + 3AX72, 3AX78 model
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) BT
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
Full throttle
45 - 53 85 - 93 136 - 144 132 - 140 75 - 83 38 - 46 45 - 53 HA
(28 - 33) (53 - 58) (85 - 89) (82 - 87) (47 - 52) (24 - 29) (28 - 33)
22 - 30 45 - 53 92 - 100 48 - 56 29 - 37 5 - 13 45 - 53
Half throttle
(14 - 19) (28 - 33) (57 - 62) (29 - 35) (18 - 23) (3 - 8) (28 - 33) SC
EL
IDX
AT-475
For the Middle East: QG16DE + 3AX64 model
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
50 - 58 96 - 104 152 - 160 148 - 156 86 - 94 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (60 - 65) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
28 - 36 55 - 63 119 - 127 76 - 84 36 - 44 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (34 - 39) (74 - 79) (47 - 52) (22 - 27) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
For the Middle East: QG16DE + 3BX07 model

Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
45 - 53 87 - 95 139 - 147 135 - 143 77 - 85 38 - 46 45 - 53

Full throttle
(28 - 33) (54 - 59) (86 - 91) (84 - 89) (48 - 53) (24 - 29) (28 - 33)
26 - 34 51 - 59 109 - 117 69 - 77 33 - 41 5 - 13 45 - 53
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (32 - 37) (68 - 73) (43 - 48) (21 - 25) (3 - 8) (28 - 33)
For the Middle East: QG18DE + 3AX10 model

Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
49 - 57 93 - 101 148 - 156 144 - 152 83 - 91 41 - 49 49 - 57

Full throttle
(30 - 35) (58 - 63) (92 - 97) (89 - 94) (52 - 57) (25 - 30) (30 - 35)
26 - 34 50 - 58 112 - 120 63 - 71 32 - 40 5 - 13 49 - 57
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (70 - 75) (39 - 44) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (30 - 35)
4. For Australia: QG16DE + 3AX19 model

Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
50 - 58 96 - 104 152 - 160 148 - 156 86 - 94 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (60 - 65) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
28 - 36 55 - 63 119 - 127 76 - 84 36 - 44 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (34 - 39) (74 - 79) (47 - 52) (22 - 27) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
For Australia: QG16DE + 3AX69 model

Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
45 - 53 87 - 95 139 - 147 135 - 143 77 - 85 38 - 46 45 - 53

Full throttle
(28 - 33) (54 - 59) (86 - 91) (84 - 89) (48 - 53) (24 - 29) (28 - 33)
26 - 34 51 - 59 109 - 117 69 - 77 33 - 41 5 - 13 45 - 53
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (32 - 37) (68 - 73) (43 - 48) (21 - 25) (3 - 8) (28 - 33)
AT-476
For Australia: QG18DE + 3AX10 model
Throttle position GI
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
49 - 57 93 - 101 148 - 156 144 - 152 83 - 91 41 - 49 49 - 57

Full throttle
(30 - 35) (58 - 63) (92 - 97) (89 - 94) (52 - 57) (25 - 30) (30 - 35) MA
26 - 34 50 - 58 112 - 120 63 - 71 32 - 40 5 - 13 49 - 57
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (70 - 75) (39 - 44) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (30 - 35)
EM
5. For Euro-OBD: QG18DE + 3AX18 model

LC
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D2 D2 , D 1 12 , 11
EC
51 - 59 97 - 105 154 - 162 150 - 158 87 - 95 41 - 49 51 - 59
Full throttle
(32 - 37) (60 - 65) (96 - 101) (93 - 98) (54 - 59) (25 - 30) (32 - 37)
28 - 36 52 - 60 117 - 125 66 - 74 33 - 41 5 - 13 51 - 59
FE
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (32 - 37) (73 - 78) (41 - 46) (21 - 25) (3 - 8) (32 - 37)
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING LOCK-UP CL

NJAT0180S02
(Throttle opening: 2.0/8, Shift pattern: Comfort)
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) MT
Engine model Model code number Destination OD switch
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
3AX00 ON (D4) 76 - 86 (48 - 53) 54 - 62 (34 - 39)

—
3AX63
OFF (D3) Not applied Not applied
QG13DE 3AX71 ON (D4) 71 - 79 (44 - 49) 51 - 59 (32 - 37)
AX
3AX72
—
3AX77
OFF (D3) Not applied Not applied
3AX78
SU
ON (D4) 91 - 99 (57 - 62) 56 - 64 (35 - 40)
QG15DE — —
OFF (D3) Not applied Not applied BR
3AX19 ON (D4) 88 - 96 (55 - 60) 64 - 72 (40 - 45)
—
3AX64
QG16DE
OFF (D3) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) ST
3AX69 ON (D4) 81 - 89 (50 - 55) 60 - 68 (37 - 42)
—
3BX07
OFF (D3) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) RS
ON (D4) 88 - 96 (55 - 60) 59 - 67 (37 - 42)
Except below
QG18DE —
OFF (D3) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) BT
Euro-OBD ON (D4) 92 - 100 (57 - 62) 67 - 75 (42 - 47)
Taiwan
South Africa OFF (D3) 96 - 104 (60 - 65) 93 - 101 (58 - 63) HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-477
Stall Revolution
Stall Revolution =NJAT0181
Engine model Stall revolution rpm
QG13DE 2,000 - 2,300
QG15DE 2,000 - 2,300
QG16DE 2,200 - 2,700
QG18DE 2,050 - 2,500
Line Pressure NJAT0182
2
Line pressure kPa (bar, kg/cm , psi)
Engine model Engine speed
R position D position 2 position 1 position
Idle 778 (7.78, 7.9, 113) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73)
QG13DE 1,125 (11.25, 11.5, 1,125 (11.25, 11.5, 1,125 (11.25, 11.5,
Stall 1,750 (17.5, 17.9, 254)
163) 163) 163)
Idle 778 (7.78, 7.9, 113) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73)
QG15DE 1,639 (16.39, 16.7, 1,053 (10.53, 10.7, 1,053 (10.53, 10.7, 1,053 (10.53, 10.7,
Stall
238) 153) 153) 153)
Idle 778 (7.78, 7.9, 113) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73)
QG16DE
1,683 (16.83, 17.2, 1,082 (10.82, 11.04, 1,082 (10.82, 11.04, 1,082 (10.82, 11.04,
Stall
244) 157) 157) 157)
Idle 778 (7.78, 7.9, 113) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73)
QG18DE 1,705 (17.05, 17.4, 1,096 (10.96, 11.2, 1,096 (10.96, 11.2, 1,096 (10.96, 11.2,
Stall
247) 159) 159) 159)
AT-478
Control Valves
Control Valves =NJAT0183

CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS NJAT0183S01
Unit: mm (in)
GI
No. Parts Part No.* Free length Outer diameter
35 3-2 timing valve spring 31736-01X00 23.0 (0.906) 6.65 (0.2618)

MA
19 Cooler check valve spring 31742-3AX05 28.04 (1.1039) 7.15 (0.2815)
23 Pilot valve spring 31742-3AX03 38.98 (1.5346) 8.9 (0.350)

EM
15 1-2 accumulator valve spring 31742-3AX00 20.5 (0.807) 6.95 (0.2736)
Upper QG13DE
LC
body 31742-3AX08 55.26 (2.1756) 19.6 (0.772)
model
Refer to
“Control
28 1-2 accumulator piston spring
QG15DE, EC
Valve QG16DE
Upper & 31742-3AX09 55.66 (2.1913) 19.5 (0.7677)
Body”, QG18DE
AT-400. models FE
33 1st reducing valve spring 31742-80X05 27.0 (1.063) 7.0 (0.276)
2 Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 31742-80X06 37.5 (1.476) 7.0 (0.276) CL
7 Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-3AX04 33.3 (1.3110) 9.0 (0.354)
10 Torque converter clutch control valve spring 31742-3AX02 53.01 (2.0870) 6.5 (0.256) MT
34 Shuttle valve spring 31762-41X04 51.0 (2.0079) 5.65 (0.2224)
18 Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-80X13 45.0 (1.772) 15.0 (0.591)
23 Overrun clutch control valve spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276)
Lower
body 27 Accumulator control valve spring 31742-80X02 22.0 (0.866) 6.5 (0.256) AX
Refer to
“Control 29 Shift valve A spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276)
Valve
2 Shift valve B spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) SU
Lower
Body”, 11 Pressure modifier piston spring 31742-41X15 30.5 (1.201) 9.8 (0.386)
AT-404.
7 Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-80X16 32.0 (1.260) 6.9 (0.272) BR
— Oil cooler relief valve spring 31872-31X00 17.02 (0.6701) 8.0 (0.315)
— T/C pressure spring 31742-3AX07 9.0 (0.354) 7.3 (0.287)

ST
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
RS
Clutch and Brakes NJAT0184
REVERSE CLUTCH NJAT0184S01
BT
Number of drive plates 2
Number of driven plates 2

HA
Standard 2.0 (0.079)
Drive plate thickness mm (in)
Allowable limit 1.8 (0.071)
SC
Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)
Clearance mm (in)
EL
Thickness mm (in) Part number*
4.4 (0.173) 31537-31X00

Thickness of retaining plates 4.6 (0.181) 31537-31X01 IDX
4.8 (0.189) 31537-31X02
5.0 (0.197) 31537-31X03
5.2 (0.205) 31537-31X04
AT-479
Clutch and Brakes (Cont’d)
HIGH CLUTCH NJAT0184S02
1. QG13DE + 3AX00, 3AX63, 3AX71, 3AX72 models

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
4.4 (0.173) 31537-32X03

4.6 (0.181) 31537-32X04
4.8 (0.189) 31537-32X05
Thickness of retaining plates
5.0 (0.197) 31537-32X06
5.2 (0.205) 31537-32X07
5.4 (0.213) 31537-32X08
5.6 (0.220) 31537-32X09
5.8 (0.228) 31537-32X10
2. QG13DE + 3AX77, 3AX78 models

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
4.8 (0.189) 31537-32X05

5.0 (0.197) 31537-32X06
Thickness of retaining plates 5.2 (0.205) 31537-32X07
5.4 (0.213) 31537-32X08
5.6 (0.220) 31537-32X09
5.8 (0.228) 31537-32X10
6.0 (0.236) 31537-32X11
3. QG15DE + 3AX01 model/QG16DE + 3AX19, 3AX64, 3AX69, 3BX07 models

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
4.8 (0.189) 31537-32X05

5.0 (0.197) 31537-32X06
Thickness of retaining plate 5.2 (0.205) 31537-32X07
5.4 (0.213) 31537-32X08
5.6 (0.220) 31537-32X09
5.8 (0.228) 31537-32X10
6.0 (0.236) 31537-32X11
AT-480
4. QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 models
GI

Drive plate thickness mm (in) MA
Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in) EM

LC
3.6 (0.142) 31537-32X12
3.8 (0.150) 31537-32X00
4.0 (0.157) 31537-32X01
Thickness of retaining plate
4.2 (0.165) 31537-32X02
EC
4.4 (0.173) 31537-32X03
4.6 (0.181) 31537-32X04
4.8 (0.189) 31537-32X05 FE
FORWARD CLUTCH CL
NJAT0184S03

MT
Standard 0.45 - 0.85 (0.0177 - 0.0335)

Clearance mm (in)
AX
3.6 (0.142) 31537-31X60

SU
3.8 (0.150) 31537-31X61
4.0 (0.157) 31537-31X62
4.2 (0.165) 31537-31X63 BR
4.4 (0.173) 31537-31X64
4.6 (0.181) 31537-31X65
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. ST
OVERRUN CLUTCH NJAT0184S04
RS

BT
HA
Standard 1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)
Clearance mm (in)
SC
3.6 (0.142) 31567-31X79

Thickness of retaining plate 3.8 (0.150) 31567-31X80 EL
4.0 (0.157) 31567-31X81
4.2 (0.165) 31567-31X82
4.4 (0.173) 31567-31X83
IDX
AT-481
LOW & REVERSE BRAKE NJAT0184S05
1. QG13DE + 3AX00, 3AX63, 3AX71, 3AX72, 3AX77, 3AX78 models
Number of driven plates 3+1

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
3.6 (0.142) 31667-31X16

3.8 (0.150) 31667-31X17
4.0 (0.157) 31667-31X18
4.2 (0.165) 31667-31X19
4.4 (0.173) 31667-31X20
4.6 (0.181) 31667-31X21
2. QG15DE + 3AX01 model/QG16DE + 3AX19, 3AX64, 3AX69, 3BX07 models/QG18DE + 3AX10,
3AX18 models
Number of driven plates 4+1

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
3.6 (0.142) 31667-31X16

3.8 (0.150) 31667-31X17
4.0 (0.157) 31667-31X18
4.2 (0.165) 31667-31X19
4.4 (0.173) 31667-31X20
4.6 (0.181) 31667-31X21
BRAKE BAND NJAT0184S06
Anchor end pin tightening torque 3.5 - 5.8 N·m (0.35 - 0.6 kg-m, 31 - 52 in-lb)
Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin 2.5±0.125
Lock nut tightening torque 31 - 36 N·m (3.2 - 3.7 kg-m, 23 - 27 ft-lb)
Clutch and Brake Return Springs NJAT0185

Unit: mm (in)
Parts Free length Outer diameter Part number*
Outer (16 pcs) 26.6 (1.047) 10.6 (0.417) 31505-31X02

Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)
Inner (16 pcs) 26.3 (1.035) 7.7 (0.303) 31505-31X03
Reverse clutch (16 pcs) 18.6 (0.732) 8.0 (0.315) 31505-31X00
High clutch (12 pcs) 19.7 (0.776) 11.1 (0.437) 31505-31X01
Low reverse brake (20 pcs) 25.1 (0.988) 7.6 (0.299) 31505-31X04
AT-482
Oil Pump
Oil Pump NJAT0186
Oil pump side clearance mm (in) 0.02 - 0.04 (0.0008 - 0.0016) GI

Inner gear
Thickness mm (in) Part number* MA

9.99 - 10.00 (0.3933 - 0.3937) 31346-31X00
9.98 - 9.99 (0.3929 - 0.3933) 31346-31X01
9.97 - 9.98 (0.3925 - 0.3929) 31346-31X02 EM
Thickness of inner gears and outer gears
Outer gear
Thickness mm (in) Part number* LC

9.99 - 10.00 (0.3933 - 0.3937) 31347-31X00
9.98 - 9.99 (0.3929 - 0.3933) 31347-31X01
9.97 - 9.98 (0.3925 - 0.3929) 31347-31X02 EC
Standard 0.08 - 0.15 (0.0031 - 0.0059)
Clearance between oil pump hous-
ing and outer gear mm (in)
Allowable limit 0.15 (0.0059) FE
Oil pump cover seal ring clearance Standard 0.1 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
mm (in) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) CL
Input Shaft MT
NJAT0187
Unit: mm (in)
Standard 0.08 - 0.23 (0.0031 - 0.0091)

Input shaft seal ring clearance
AX
Planetary Carrier NJAT0188
Unit: mm (in)
SU
Standard 0.15 - 0.70 (0.0059 - 0.0276)
Clearance between planetary carrier and pin-
ion washer
BR
Final Drive NJAT0189
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE NJAT0189S01 ST
Clearance between side gear and differential case with washer 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS RS

NJAT0189S02
1. QG13DE + 3AX00, 3AX63, 3AX71, 3AX72, 3AX77, 3AX78 models/QG15DE + 3AX01 model
NJAT0189S0201
BT
0.75 - 0.80 (0.0295 - 0.0315) 38424-31X00

0.80 - 0.85 (0.0315 - 0.0335) 38424-31X01 HA
0.85 - 0.90 (0.0335 - 0.0354) 38424-31X02
0.90 - 0.95 (0.0354 - 0.0374) 38424-31X03
0.95 - 1.00 (0.0374 - 0.0394) 38424-31X04
SC
2. QG16DE + 3AX19, 3AX64, 3AX69, 3BX07 models/QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 models NJAT0189S0202 EL
0.75 - 0.80 (0.0295 - 0.0315) 38424-D2111 IDX

0.80 - 0.85 (0.0315 - 0.0335) 38424-D2112
0.85 - 0.90 (0.0335 - 0.0354) 38424-D2113
0.90 - 0.95 (0.0354 - 0.0374) 38424-D2114
0.95 - 1.00 (0.0374 - 0.0394) 38424-D2115
AT-483
BEARING PRELOAD NJAT0189S03
Differential side bearing preload “T” 0.04 - 0.09 mm (0.0016 - 0.0035 in)
TURNING TORQUE NJAT0189S04
Turning torque of final drive assembly 0.49 - 1.08 N·m (5.0 - 11.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 9.5 in-lb)
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS NJAT0189S05

1. QG13DE + 3AX00, 3AX63, 3AX71, 3AX72, 3AX77, 3AX78 models/QG15DE + 3AX01 model/
QG16DE + 3AX19, 3AX64, 3AX69, 3BX07 models NJAT0189S0501
0.40 (0.0157) 38454-M8001

0.44 (0.0173) 38454-M8003
0.48 (0.0189) 38454-M8005
0.52 (0.0205) 38454-M8007
0.56 (0.0220) 38454-M8009
0.60 (0.0236) 38454-M8011
0.64 (0.0252) 38454-M8013
0.68 (0.0268) 38454-M8015
2. QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 models NJAT0189S0502
0.40 (0.0157) 31499-21X07

0.44 (0.0173) 31499-21X05
0.48 (0.0189) 31499-21X09
0.52 (0.0205) 31499-21X10
0.56 (0.0220) 31499-21X11
0.60 (0.0236) 31499-21X12
0.64 (0.0252) 31499-21X13
0.68 (0.0268) 31499-21X14
0.72 (0.0283) 31499-21X15
0.76 (0.0299) 31499-21X16
0.80 (0.0315) 31499-21X17
0.84 (0.0331) 31499-21X18
0.88 (0.0346) 31499-21X19
0.92 (0.0362) 31499-21X20
1.44 (0.0567) 31499-21X12
AT-484
TABLE FOR SELECTING DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS NJAT0189S06
Unit: mm (in)
Dial indicator deflection Suitable shim(s)

GI
0.31 - 0.35 (0.0122 - 0.0138) 0.40 (0.0157)
0.35 - 0.39 (0.0138 - 0.0154) 0.44 (0.0173) MA
0.39 - 0.43 (0.0154 - 0.0169) 0.48 (0.0189)
0.43 - 0.47 (0.0169 - 0.0185) 0.52 (0.0205)
0.47 - 0.51 (0.0185 - 0.0201) 0.56 (0.0220)
0.51 - 0.55 (0.0201 - 0.0217) 0.60 (0.0236) EM
0.55 - 0.59 (0.0217 - 0.0232) 0.64 (0.0252)
0.59 - 0.63 (0.0232 - 0.0248) 0.68 (0.0268)
0.63 - 0.67 (0.0248 - 0.0264) 0.72 (0.0283) LC
0.67 - 0.71 (0.0264 - 0.0280) 0.76 (0.0299)
0.71 - 0.75 (0.0280 - 0.0295) 0.80 (0.0315)
0.75 - 0.79 (0.0295 - 0.0311) 0.84 (0.0331)
0.79 - 0.83 (0.0311 - 0.0327) 0.88 (0.0346) EC
0.83 - 0.87 (0.0327 - 0.0343) 0.92 (0.0362)
0.87 - 0.91 (0.0343 - 0.0358) 0.48 (0.0189) + 0.48 (0.0189)
0.91 - 0.95 (0.0358 - 0.0374) 0.48 (0.0189) + 0.52 (0.0205)
0.95 - 0.99 (0.0374 - 0.0390) 0.52 (0.0205) + 0.52 (0.0205)
FE
0.99 - 1.03 (0.0390 - 0.0406) 0.52 (0.0205) + 0.56 (0.0220)
1.03 - 1.07 (0.0406 - 0.0421) 0.56 (0.0220) + 0.56 (0.0220)
1.07 - 1.11 (0.0421 - 0.0437) 0.56 (0.0220) + 0.60 (0.0236) CL
1.11 - 1.15 (0.0437 - 0.0453) 0.60 (0.0236) + 0.60 (0.0236)
1.15 - 1.19 (0.0453 - 0.0469) 0.60 (0.0236) + 0.64 (0.0252)
1.19 - 1.23 (0.0469 - 0.0484) 0.64 (0.0252) + 0.64 (0.0252)
1.23 - 1.27 (0.0484 - 0.0500) 0.64 (0.0252) + 0.68 (0.0268)
MT
1.27 - 1.31 (0.0500 - 0.0516) 0.68 (0.0268) + 0.68 (0.0268)
1.31 - 1.35 (0.0516 - 0.0531) 0.68 (0.0268) + 0.72 (0.0283)
1.35 - 1.39 (0.0531 - 0.0547) 1.44 (0.0567)
1.39 - 1.43 (0.0547 - 0.0563) 0.72 (0.0283) + 0.76 (0.0299)
1.43 - 1.47 (0.0563 - 0.0579) 0.76 (0.0299) + 0.76 (0.0299)
1.47 - 1.51 (0.0579 - 0.0594) 0.76 (0.0299) + 0.80 (0.0315)
1.51 - 1.55 (0.0594 - 0.0610) 0.80 (0.0315) + 0.80 (0.0315) AX
1.55 - 1.59 (0.0610 - 0.0626) 0.80 (0.0315) + 0.84 (0.0331)
1.59 - 1.63 (0.0626 - 0.0642) 0.84 (0.0331) + 0.84 (0.0331)
1.63 - 1.67 (0.0642 - 0.0657) 0.84 (0.0331) + 0.88 (0.0346) SU
1.67 - 1.71 (0.0657 - 0.0673) 0.88 (0.0346) + 0.88 (0.0346)
1.71 - 1.75 (0.0673 - 0.0689) 0.88 (0.0346) + 0.92 (0.0362)
1.75 - 1.79 (0.0689 - 0.0705) 0.92 (0.0362) + 0.92 (0.0362)
1.79 - 1.83 (0.0705 - 0.0720) 0.92 (0.0362) + 0.96 (0.0378) BR
1.83 - 1.87 (0.0720 - 0.0736) 0.96 (0.0378) + 0.96 (0.0378)
1.87 - 1.91 (0.0736 - 0.0752) 0.52 (0.0205) + 1.44 (0.0567)
1.91 - 1.95 (0.0752 - 0.0768) 0.56 (0.0220) + 1.44 (0.0567) ST
Reduction Pinion Gear NJAT0190
BEARING PRELOAD RS
NJAT0190S01
Reduction pinion gear bearing preload 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)

BT
TURNING TORQUE NJAT0190S02
Turning torque of reduction pinion gear 0.1 - 0.69 N·m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb) HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-485
Reduction Pinion Gear (Cont’d)
REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS NJAT0190S03
1.74 (0.0685) 31438-31X16

1.78 (0.0701) 31438-31X17
1.82 (0.0717) 31438-31X18
1.86 (0.0732) 31438-31X19
1.90 (0.0748) 31438-31X20
1.92 (0.0756) 31439-31X60
1.94 (0.0764) 31438-31X21
1.96 (0.0772) 31439-31X61
1.98 (0.0780) 31438-31X22
2.00 (0.0787) 31439-31X62
2.02 (0.0795) 31438-31X23
2.04 (0.0803) 31439-31X63
2.06 (0.0811) 31438-31X24
2.08 (0.0819) 31439-31X64
2.10 (0.0827) 31438-31X60
2.12 (0.0835) 31439-31X65
2.14 (0.0843) 31438-31X61
2.16 (0.0850) 31439-31X66
2.18 (0.0858) 31438-31X62
2.20 (0.0866) 31439-31X67
2.22 (0.0874) 31438-31X63
2.24 (0.0882) 31439-31X68
2.26 (0.0890) 31438-31X64
2.28 (0.0898) 31439-31X69
2.30 (0.0906) 31438-31X65
2.34 (0.0921) 31438-31X66
2.38 (0.0937) 31438-31X67
2.42 (0.0953) 31438-31X68
2.46 (0.0969) 31438-31X69
2.50 (0.0984) 31438-31X70
2.54 (0.1000) 31438-31X71
2.58 (0.1016) 31438-31X72
2.62 (0.1031) 31438-31X73
2.66 (0.1047) 31438-31X74
AT-486
Reduction Pinion Gear (Cont’d)
TABLE FOR SELECTING REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM NJAT0190S04
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension “T” Suitable shim(s)

GI
1.77 - 1.81 (0.0697 - 0.0713) 1.74 (0.0685)
1.81 - 1.85 (0.0713 - 0.0728) 1.78 (0.0701) MA
1.85 - 1.89 (0.0728 - 0.0744) 1.82 (0.0717)
1.89 - 1.93 (0.0744 - 0.0760) 1.86 (0.0732)
1.93 - 1.96 (0.0760 - 0.0772) 1.90 (0.0748)
1.96 - 1.98 (0.0772 - 0.0780) 1.92 (0.0756) EM
1.98 - 2.00 (0.0780 - 0.0787) 1.94 (0.0764)
2.00 - 2.02 (0.0787 - 0.0795) 1.96 (0.0772)
2.02 - 2.04 (0.0795 - 0.0803) 1.98 (0.0780) LC
2.04 - 2.06 (0.0803 - 0.0811) 2.00 (0.0787)
2.06 - 2.08 (0.0811 - 0.0819) 2.02 (0.0795)
2.08 - 2.10 (0.0819 - 0.0827) 2.04 (0.0803)
2.10 - 2.12 (0.0827 - 0.0835) 2.06 (0.0811) EC
2.12 - 2.14 (0.0835 - 0.0843) 2.08 (0.0819)
2.14 - 2.16 (0.0843 - 0.0850) 2.10 (0.0827)
2.16 - 2.18 (0.0850 - 0.0858) 2.12 (0.0835)
2.18 - 2.20 (0.0858 - 0.0866) 2.14 (0.0843)
FE
2.20 - 2.22 (0.0866 - 0.0874) 2.16 (0.0850)
2.22 - 2.24 (0.0874 - 0.0888) 2.18 (0.0858)
2.24 - 2.26 (0.0882 - 0.0890) 2.20 (0.0866) CL
2.26 - 2.28 (0.0890 - 0.0898) 2.22 (0.0874)
2.28 - 2.30 (0.0898 - 0.0906) 2.24 (0.0882)
2.30 - 2.32 (0.0906 - 0.0913) 2.26 (0.0890)
2.32 - 2.34 (0.0913 - 0.0921) 2.28 (0.0898)
MT
2.34 - 2.37 (0.0921 - 0.0933) 2.30 (0.0906)
2.37 - 2.41 (0.0933 - 0.0949) 2.34 (0.0921)
2.41 - 2.45 (0.0949 - 0.0965) 2.38 (0.0937)
2.45 - 2.49 (0.0965 - 0.0980) 2.42 (0.0953)
2.49 - 2.53 (0.0980 - 0.0996) 2.46 (0.0969)
2.53 - 2.57 (0.0996 - 0.1012) 2.50 (0.0984)
2.57 - 2.61 (0.1012 - 0.1028) 2.54 (0.1000) AX
2.61 - 2.65 (0.1028 - 0.1043) 2.58 (0.1016)
2.65 - 2.69 (0.1043 - 0.1059) 2.62 (0.1031)
2.69 - 2.73 (0.1059 - 0.1075) 2.66 (0.1047) SU
Output Shaft — Except 3AX10 and 3AX18
models BR
NJAT0238
SEAL RING CLEARANCE NJAT0238S01
Unit: mm (in) ST
Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Output shaft seal ring clearance
Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) RS
BEARING PRELOAD NJAT0238S02
BT
Output shaft bearing preload 0.03 - 0.08 mm (0.0012 - 0.0031 in)
TURNING TORQUE NJAT0238S03 HA

Turning torque of output shaft 0.25 - 0.88 N·m (2.5 - 9.0 kg-cm, 2.2 - 7.8 in-lb)
SC
EL
IDX
AT-487
Output Shaft — Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models (Cont’d)
OUTPUT SHAFT BEARING ADJUSTING SPACERS NJAT0238S04
6.26 (0.2465) 31437-31X16

6.30 (0.2480) 31437-31X17
6.34 (0.2496) 31437-31X18
6.38 (0.2512) 31437-31X19
6.42 (0.2528) 31437-31X20
6.46 (0.2543) 31437-31X21
6.50 (0.2559) 31437-31X22
6.54 (0.2575) 31437-31X23
6.58 (0.2591) 31437-31X24
6.62 (0.2606) 31437-31X60
6.64 (0.2614) 31437-31X78
6.66 (0.2622) 31437-31X61
6.68 (0.2630) 31437-31X79
6.70 (0.2638) 31437-31X62
6.72 (0.2646) 31437-31X80
6.74 (0.2654) 31437-31X63
6.76 (0.2661) 31437-31X81
6.78 (0.2669) 31437-31X64
6.80 (0.2677) 31437-31X82
6.82 (0.2685) 31437-31X65
6.84 (0.2693) 31437-31X83
6.86 (0.2701) 31437-31X66
6.88 (0.2709) 31437-31X84
6.90 (0.2717) 31437-31X67
6.92 (0.2724) 31437-31X46
6.94 (0.2732) 31437-31X68
6.96 (0.2740) 31437-31X47
6.98 (0.2748) 31437-31X69
7.00 (0.2756) 31437-31X48
7.02 (0.2764) 31437-31X70
7.06 (0.2780) 31437-31X71
7.10 (0.2795) 31437-31X72
7.14 (0.2811) 31437-31X73
7.18 (0.2827) 31437-31X74
7.22 (0.2843) 31437-31X75
AT-488
Output Shaft — Except 3AX10 and 3AX18 models (Cont’d)
TABLE FOR SELECTING OUTPUT SHAFT BEARING ADJUSTING SPACER NJAT0238S05
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension “T” Suitable spacer

GI
6.29 - 6.33 (0.2476 - 0.2492) 6.26 (0.2465)
6.33 - 6.37 (0.2492 - 0.2508) 6.30 (0.2480) MA
6.37 - 6.41 (0.2508 - 0.2524) 6.34 (0.2496)
6.41 - 6.45 (0.2524 - 0.2539) 6.38 (0.2512)
6.45 - 6.49 (0.2539 - 0.2555) 6.42 (0.2528)
6.49 - 6.53 (0.2555 - 0.2571) 6.46 (0.2543) EM
6.53 - 6.57 (0.2571 - 0.2587) 6.50 (0.2559)
6.57 - 6.61 (0.2587 - 0.2602) 6.54 (0.2575)
6.61 - 6.65 (0.2602 - 0.2618) 6.58 (0.2591) LC
6.65 - 6.68 (0.2618 - 0.2630) 6.62 (0.2606)
6.68 - 6.70 (0.2630 - 0.2638) 6.64 (0.2614)
6.70 - 6.72 (0.2638 - 0.2646) 6.66 (0.2622)
6.72 - 6.74 (0.2646 - 0.2654) 6.68 (0.2630) EC
6.74 - 6.76 (0.2654 - 0.2661) 6.70 (0.2638)
6.76 - 6.78 (0.2661 - 0.2669) 6.72 (0.2646)
6.78 - 6.80 (0.2669 - 0.2677) 6.74 (0.2654)
6.80 - 6.82 (0.2677 - 0.2685) 6.76 (0.2661)
FE
6.82 - 6.84 (0.2685 - 0.2693) 6.78 (0.2669)
6.84 - 6.86 (0.2693 - 0.2701) 6.80 (0.2677)
6.86 - 6.88 (0.2701 - 0.2709) 6.82 (0.2685) CL
6.88 - 6.90 (0.2709 - 0.2717) 6.84 (0.2693)
6.90 - 6.92 (0.2717 - 0.2724) 6.86 (0.2701)
6.92 - 6.94 (0.2724 - 0.2732) 6.88 (0.2707)
6.94 - 6.96 (0.2732 - 0.2740) 6.90 (0.2717)
MT
6.96 - 6.98 (0.2740 - 0.2748) 6.92 (0.2724)
6.98 - 7.00 (0.2748 - 0.2756) 6.94 (0.2732)
7.00 - 7.02 (0.2756 - 0.2764) 6.96 (0.2790)
7.02 - 7.04 (0.2764 - 0.2772) 6.98 (0.2748)
7.04 - 7.06 (0.2772 - 0.2780) 7.00 (0.2756)
7.06 - 7.09 (0.2780 - 0.2791) 7.02 (0.2764)
7.09 - 7.13 (0.2791 - 0.2807) 7.06 (0.2780) AX
7.13 - 7.17 (0.2807 - 0.2823) 7.10 (0.2795)
7.17 - 7.21 (0.2823 - 0.2839) 7.14 (0.2811)
7.21 - 7.25 (0.2839 - 0.2854) 7.18 (0.2827) SU
7.25 - 7.29 (0.2854 - 0.2870) 7.22 (0.2843)
Output Shaft — 3AX10 and 3AX18 models NJAT0191

BR
Unit: mm (in)
ST
Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Output shaft seal ring clearance
RS
END PLAY NJAT0191S02
Output shaft end play 0 - 0.5 mm (0 - 0.020 in) BT

OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY ADJUSTING SHIMS NJAT0191S03
HA
0.56 (0.0220) 31438-31X46

0.96 (0.0378) 31438-31X47
SC
1.36 (0.0535) 31438-31X48
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. EL
IDX
AT-489
Bearing Retainer
Bearing Retainer =NJAT0192

Unit: mm (in)
Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)

Bearing retainer seal ring clearance
Total End Play NJAT0193
Total end play “T3” 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY NJAT0193S01
0.6 (0.024) 31435-31X01

0.8 (0.031) 31435-31X02
1.0 (0.039) 31435-31X03
1.2 (0.047) 31435-31X04
1.4 (0.055) 31435-31X05
1.6 (0.063) 31435-31X06
1.8 (0.071) 31435-31X07
2.0 (0.079) 31435-31X08
Reverse Clutch End Play NJAT0194
Reverse clutch end play “T4” 0.65 - 1.00 mm (0.0256 - 0.0394 in)
THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY NJAT0194S01
0.65 (0.0256) 31508-31X10

0.80 (0.0315) 31508-31X11
0.95 (0.0374) 31508-31X12
1.10 (0.0433) 31508-31X13
1.25 (0.0492) 31508-31X14
1.40 (0.0551) 31508-31X15
Accumulator NJAT0195
O-RING NJAT0195S01
Unit: mm (in)
Accumulator Diameter (Small) Part number* Diameter (Large) Part number*
Servo release accumulator 26.9 (1.059) 31526-41X03 44.2 (1.740) 31526-41X02
N-D accumulator 34.6 (1.362) 31526-31X08 39.4 (1.551) 31672-21X00
RETURN SPRING NJAT0195S02

Unit: mm (in)
Accumulator Free length Outer diameter Part number*
QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 models 52.5 (2.067) 20.1 (0.791) 31605-80X00

Servo release accumulator spring
Except QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 mod-
52.5 (2.067) 20.4 (0.803) 31605-80X03
els
N-D accumulator spring 45.0 (1.772) 27.6 (1.087) 31605-33X01
AT-490
Band Servo
Band Servo NJAT0196

RETURN SPRING NJAT0196S01
Unit: mm (in)
GI
Return spring Free length Outer diameter Part number*
2nd servo return spring 32.5 (1.280) 25.9 (1.020) 31605-31X20

MA
OD servo return spring 38.52 (1.5165) 22.0 (0.866) 31605-31X21
EM
Removal and Installation NJAT0197

Unit: mm (in)
LC
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter 15.9 (0.626) or more
EC
Shift Solenoid Valves NJAT0223
Gear Solenoid A Solenoid B FE

1st ON ON
2nd OFF ON CL
3rd OFF OFF
4th ON OFF MT
Solenoid Valves NJAT0224
Solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.) Terminal number
Shift solenoid A 20 - 30Ω 2

AX
Shift solenoid B 5 - 20Ω 1
Ovr. clutch sol. 20 - 30Ω 3

SU
Line pres. sol. 2.5 - 5Ω 4
T/conv. clutch sol. 5 - 20Ω 5

BR
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor NJAT0225
ST
Monitor item Temperature Specificaiton (Approximately)
Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ

A/T fluid temperature sensor " " " RS
Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ
Revolution Sensor NJAT0226

BT
Condition Judgement standard
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring HA
function.*1
CAUTION: Approximately 150 Hz
Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector. SC
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item.
When vehicle parks. Under 1.3V or over 4.5V

EL
Dropping Resistor NJAT0227
Resistance 10 - 15Ω IDX
AT-491
NOTES

Automatic Transaxle: Service Data and Specifications (SDS) Have Been Changed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automatic Transaxle: Service Data and Specifications (SDS) Have Been Changed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automatic Transaxle: Service Data and Specifications (SDS) Have Been Changed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE GI

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T (REVOLUTION

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NJAT0243

Available With Euro-OBD system EM

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-205

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-218

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-190

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-240

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-268

PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-184 AX

SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 P0755 AT-253 SU

TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 P1705 AT-259 BR

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Available With Euro-OBD system

Not available (blank) Without Euro-OBD system

P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-184

P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-190

P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 AT-196

P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-201

P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-205

P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-212

P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-218

P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-224

P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-234

P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-240

P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 AT-247

P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 AT-253

P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 AT-259

P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-268

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

I Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

I Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the out-

Special Service Tools NJAT0006

ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

KV31103000 Installing differential oil seal

ST35325000 Installing differential oil seal

ST23540000 Removing and installing parking rod plate, manual RS

KV32101000 Installing throttle lever and manual shaft retaining HA

ST3306S001 Removing differential side bearing inner race

KV381054S0 I Removing idler gear bearing outer race

ST27180001 I Removing idler gear

ST30031000 Removing reduction gear bearing inner race

ST35272000 I Installing reduction gear bearing inner race

ST37830000 Installing idler gear bearing outer race

ST35321000 Installing output shaft bearing

ST33400001 I Installing oil pump housing oil seal

KV38105710 I Measuring clearance between side gear and MT

KV40104840 I Installing output shaft bearing outer race onto

Commercial Service Tools NJAT0007 ST

Puller I Removing idler gear bearing inner race RS

Drift Installing differential left side bearing EL

Tool name Description

Drift Installing differential right side bearing

Checking A/T Fluid NJAT0228

Changing A/T Fluid NJAT0229 ST

A/T Electrical Parts Location NJAT0008

Circuit Diagram NJAT0009